Chevrolet Suburban 1998 Owner's Manual

&. '*
U--
The 1998 Chevrolet Tahoe and Suburban Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you howto use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.
2- 1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and AudioSystems
This section tells you howto adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells whatto do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manualtells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8- 1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you howto contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GM
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLETEmblem, the name
TAHOE and the name SURBURBANare registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information atthe time it
was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes in the
product afterthat time without further notice.For
vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this
manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.If you
sell thevehicle, please leave thismanual in it so the new
owner canuse it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C9809 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National InstiMe for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propri6taires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire dece guideen frangais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing ServicesLtd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T lB9
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end whenthey first receive their new vehicle. If you
and
do this, it will help you learn about the features
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and wordswork together to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tellyou
about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the cautionarea, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Pleaseread these cautions.If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
iii
You will also finda circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area, we tell youabout something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, andit could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in thisbook you will find these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used onan
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
n
1-(e
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
COOLANT
TEMP
TURN
SIGNALS
69
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
,\I/,
DAYTIME
RUNNING *
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
-
a
0
$0
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN
-I-1
FUSE
LIGHTER
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
-%-
t
m
(0)
)cr
a
b
B
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
w,
SPEAKER
FUEL
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
2-Door Utility
Suburban
vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in
your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-17
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-30
1-31
1-31
1-38
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts:They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly
Driver Position
Safety Belt UseDuring Pregnancy
Right FrontPassenger Position
Air Bag System
Center PassengerPosition
1-40
1-44
1-46
1-49
1-60
1-63
1-64
1-64
Rear SeatPassengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
Seats and SeatControls
This sectiontells you about the seats-- how to adjust
them and fold them up and down. It also tellsyou about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
If your vehicle has a manual
bucket, split bench or full
bench seat, you can adjust it
with this lever at the front
of the seat.
Manual Front Seat
-A
CAUTION:
You can lose controlof the vehicleif you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal whenyou
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat
only when
the vehicleis not moving.
1-2
Slide the lever atthe front of the seat toward the
passenger’s side tounlock it. Using your body, slide the
seat towhere you want it. Then, release the lever and try
to move the seatwith your body to make sure the seat is
locked intoplace.
Power Seat(s) (If Equipped)
raise the rearof the seat, move the rearlever up. To
lower the rearof the seat, move the rear
lever down.
The switch locatedat the front of this control panel
is for the power lumbar adjustment, which is
explained next.
Power Lumbar Adjustment(If Equipped)
If you have power lumbar
adjustment, you can
increase or decrease lumbar
support in an area of the
lower seatback.
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s or
passenger’s side, you can adjust itwith these controls at
the outside edge of the seat. The switch is located on the
side of the seat, next to the door.
You can use the round center knob to move the seat to
where you want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up.
To lower the seat, move the knob down. To move the
seat forward, move the knob toward the front of the
vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the knob
toward the rearof the vehicle.
To increase support,press and hold the front of the
rocker switch. Let goof the switch when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also raise and lower thefront and rear of the seat.
To raise the frontof the seat, move the front lever up.
To
lower the front of the seat, move the front lever down.
To
To decrease support,press and hold the rear of the
rocker switch. Let goof the switch when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
1-3
Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
The control forthe driver’s side heated seat is located
on the left side of the seat. The control for
the right front
passenger is located on the right side of the passenger
seat. Move the switch forward to MED or HIGH
temperature toturn on the heating elements in the seat.
The right frontpassenger’s safety belt must be buckled
before the heating elements in
that seat will operate.
To turn the heated seats off, move the switch rearward
to OFF.
To adjust the seatback, move the lever rearward.
1-4
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Move the leveragain rearward and the seatback will go
to an upright position.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, itwill be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould be there, not at yourpelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Slide thehead restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint isclosest to the top of your ears. Thisposition
reduces the chance of a neck injury ina crash.
To fold a seatback forward,
pull this lever forward and
tilt the seatback forward.
Seatback Latches(2-Door Utility)
A CAUTION:
-
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop
or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sure it
is locked.
The front seatback folds forward to letyou access
the rearof the vehicle.
1-6
To return the seatback to the upright position, just push
the seatback rearward until it latches.
After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull
the seatbackforward to make sure it is locked.
Easy Entry Seat (2-Door Utility)
I
A CAUTION:
If any easy entry seatisn’t locked,it can move. In
a sudden stop or crash, the person sitting there
could be injured. And, even if there is no crash or
sudden stop, a driver sitting an
in unlocked easy
entry seat could be startled
by the sudden
movement and hit the wrong control or pedal,
causing an accident. After you’ve used it, be sure
to push rearwardon any easy entry seat to be
sure itis locked.
The driver and passengerfront bucket seat and the
60/40 split bench seat of your vehicle have an easy
entry feature. This makes it easyto get in and out of the
rear seat. On vehicles equipped with the power driver’s
seat, onlythe passenger’s front seat will have the easy
entry feature.
To operate the seat, pull
forward on the topof the
lever located at the sideof
the seatback, and tilt the
back forward toward the
front of the vehicle.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or
push the seat forward until it stops.
To return the seat to its regular position, return the
seatback to its upright position, then push the whole
seat rearward until it latches.
After returning the seat to its regular position, try to
move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is
locked into place.
1-7
Rear Seats
A CAUTION:
Folding the Rear Seat (2-Door Utility Model)
If your vehicle has a rear seat, the seat can be folded flat
for more cargo space. Before folding, make sure that
nothing is under or in front of the seat. When the seat is
folded, itwill lay almost flat on the floor.
If a head restraint is not installedon the seatback
or stored in the vehicle properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle ina crash or sudden
maneuver. Peoplein the vehicle could beinjured.
Remove the head restraints only when you need
to fold the seat, and be sure thatthe head
restraints are stored securely inthe storage bag
and placed under the rear seat. Whenthe seat is
returned to the passenger position, be sure the
head restraints are installed properly.
Detach the storage bag from the back of the rear seat.
Then, put the head restraints in the storage bag and
place thebag in the rear seat footwell, under the seat.
1-8
To fold the seat, pull on the release handle at the bottom
of the seat cushion marked RELEASE.
When you release the seat cushion, the seatback is
automatically released. Pull the loop on the seatback
forward and fold the seatback onto theseat cushion.
To return the seat to the passenger position, just lift up
on the seatback and push it rearward until it latches.
After returning the seat to the passenger position, pull
forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked into
place. Also, return the safety belts and head restraints to
their original positions, so they will be available forrear
seat passengers to use.
1-9
Folding the Rear Seat(&Door Utility Model)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 rear seat, either side
may be
folded down to giveyou more cargo space.
To fold the seat, pull up
on the strap loop at the
rear of the seat cushion.
Before folding, place the latch
portion of the center
safety beltin the center armrest. Thatway, the center
safety beltwill be outof the way when the seat is folded
and also will be easily available forpassengers to use
when the seat is returnedto the passenger position. Also,
make sure that nothing is under or in frontof the seat.
When the seat is folded, itwill lay flat on thefloor.
Then, pull the seat cushion up and fold it forward.
After folding the seatcushion fully forward, pull
the seatbackforward and fold the seatback down
until it is flat.
Set the head restraints aside fornow. You will store
them in their proper position after you are done
folding the seat.
1-10
Then, store the head
restraints by sliding them
into the rear of the seat
cushion. Make sure the
posts go in all the way.
To return the seat to the passenger position,fist remove
the head restraints by sliding them out of the seat cushion.
Lift the seatback up and push rearwardall the way. Then,
lower the seat cushion until it latchesin position.
Folding the SecondSeat (Suburban)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 rear seat, either sidemay
be folded down to give
you more cargo space.
Before folding, place the latch
portion of the center
safety belt in the center armrest.That way, the center
safety belt will be out of the way when the seat is folded
and also will be easily available for passengers to use
when the seat is returned tothe passenger position. Also,
make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat.
When the seat is folded, it will lay flat on the floor.
When folding the seat,
first remove the head
restraints. Push the release
buttons at the bottom of
After returning the seat to the passenger position, return
the head restraints to the top of the seatback. Pull
forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to
make sure that the seat is securely in place.
If the latch plate portion of the center safety belt was put
in the center armrest when the seat was folded, takethe
latch plate portion out and place it on the seat. Thatway,
the center position safety belt will be available for the
center rear seat passenger to use.
Set thehead restraints aside fornow. You will store
them in their proper positionsafter you are done
folding the seat.
1-11
To fold the seat, pull up on
the strap loopat the rear
outer edgeof the seat
cushion. Then, pull the seat
After folding the seat cushion forward,push down on
the lever atthe side of the seatback and fold the seatback
forward until it is flat.
1-12
store the head
restraints by sliding them
into the rear of the seat
cushion. Make sure the
posts go in all the way.
.,
To create a load floor,
release the panels from the
seatback by pushing
rearward on the latch and
fold them out to cover the
rear seat footwell.
To return the seat to thepassenger position, lift the
load floor panels and latch them into the seatback.
Then lift the rear seatback up and push rearward until it
latches. Return the head restraints
to their original positions
and lower the seat cushion untilit latches into position.
After returning the seatto the passenger position, pull
forward on the seatbackand up on the cushion to make
sure the seatis locked into place.
If the latch plate portion of
the center safety belt was put
in the center armrest whenthe seat was folded, take the
latch plate portion out andplace it on the seat. That way,
the center position safetybelt will be available for the
center rear seat passengerto use.
Entry to the Rear Seat (SuburbanSecond Seat)
The right side of the rear 60/40 split folding bench seat
has an easy entry feature. That makes it easy to get in
and out of the third seat, if you have one.
To operate the seat, move the lever at the side of the
seat down.
Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by
pulling the top of the seatback forward.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull the
seat forward until it stops.
There is a foot-operated
release lever for rear seat
1-13
To release the easy entry second seat,lift up on the
top of the release lever with your foot. Push the top
of the seatback forward and tilt it toward the front of
the vehicle.
To return the seat to its regular position, return the
seatback to its upright position, then push the whole
seat rearward until it latches.
After returning the seat to its regular position,try to
move theseat with your body, to make surethe seat is
locked intoplace.
A seat thatisn’t lockedinto place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle couldbe injured. Be sure to lock
the seatinto placeproperly when installing it.
1-14
A CAUTION:
A safety beltthat is twistedor not properly
attached won’t providethe protection needed ina
crash. The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installingthe seat, always
check to be sure thatthe safety beltsare not
twisted and areproperly attached.
Removing the Rear (Suburban Third Seat)
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it can be taken out for
more cargo space.
Then, hang the latch plate
end of the belt on thehook
at the top of the retractor
cover, out of the way.
Before removing the seat, unlatch the outside passenger
position safety belts from the seat frame.
To unlatch the safety
belt, press the tip of a
key into the release hole
of the safety belt attachment
while pulling up on the
safety belt.
To remove the seat, fully open the rear load doors and
enter the back of the vehicle.
1-15
Move the seatback release
lever, at the right rear of the
seat, toward the center of
the vehicle.
Then, fold the seatback forward into the seat cushion.
To unlatch the seat from the
floor, pull up on the center
release handle at the rear of
the seat and lift the rear seat
up, off ofthe floor.
Turn the seat sideways and take it outof the vehicle.
1-16
Replacing the Rear Seat
To put the seat back in, hold the seat sidewaysand put
it into the vehicle. Turn the seat to the forward position
and set it down, with the latches at the bottomof the seat
over the hooks in the floor. Pull up on the center release
handle and let the seat drop into place. Release the
handle to let the seat latch close and make sureit locks
into place. Then, move the seatback release leverat the
right rear of the seat toward the center of the vehicle and
raise the seatback.
After returning the seatback to the upright position,push
the seatback forward to make sure it is locked into place.
Then, return the outside passenger position safetybelts
to the seat frame buckles, so they will be available for
rear seat passengers to use.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the airbag system.
-
r A CAUT’3N:
I
-
Don’t let anyone ride where he
or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt,your injuries
can be much worse.You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejectedfrom it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if youare buckled up. Alwaysfasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
KCAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allowpeople to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a
safety belt properly.
1-17
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as areminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash.If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashesare mild, and some crashes can be so
serious thateven buckled up aperson wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between.In many of them,
people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After morethan 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts areclear. In most crashes bucklingup does
matter ... a lot!
1-18
-
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-19
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-20
or the instrument panel ..
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
Q.’ Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if
you are belted.
Q.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safetybelts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use
of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas
air bags,you still have to buckle up to getthe most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-21
Q:
If I’m a good driver, andI never drivefar from
home, why should I wear safetybelts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even onethat isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can situp straight.
1-22
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end ofthis section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, movethe shoulder belt
adjuster tothe height that isright for you.
To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move
the adjuster up just by pushingup on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder.The belt should be
away from your face and neck,but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-24
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash,you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
1
A:
I
I
1
1
i
I
I
I
1
I
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-25
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.
In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, notat the
pelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal
injuries. Always buckle your beltinto the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-26
Q.'
What's wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this.The belt would bemuch
too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones,and thatcould
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-27
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. aIncrash, your
body would movetoo far forward,which would
increase the chanceof head andneck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones.
You could alsoseverely injure internal organs
like your liver or
spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should
be worn over the shoulder atall times.
1-28
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces.
If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it canwork properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
I
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don't wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-30
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that thefetus won’t be hurt in a crash.For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear theright front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see “DriverPosition” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except forone thing.
If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” reduced-force
frontal air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another
air bag for theright front passenger.
Reduced-force frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very
quickly if they are to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
A CAUTION:
You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints’’ to the safety
belts. All air bags even reduced-force air
bags are designed to work with safety belts,
but don’t replace them.Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate to severe crashes where the
front of your vehicle hits something. Theyaren’t
designed to inflate at all in rollover,rear, side or
low-speed frontal crashes. And,for unrestrained
occupants, reduced-forceair bags mayprovide
less protection infrontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided inthe past.
Everyone in your vehicle should weara safety belt
properly whether or not there’s an airbag for
that person.
--
--
--
--
1-31
A CAUTION:
’
A
I
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re tooclose to an inflating
air bag, it could seriously injure
you. This is true
even with reduced-force frontal air
bags. Safety
belts help keepyou in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
as
reduced-force airbags. The driver should sit
far backas possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
1-32
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, very
or close to, an
air bag when it inflates can
be seriously injured
or killed. This is trueeven though yourvehicle
has reduced-force frontal airbags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for
young children andinfants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag systemis designed forthem. Young children
a child
and infants need the protection that
restraint system canprovide. Always secure
children properly in your
vehicle. To read how,
see the partof this manual called “Children” and
see the caution labelson the sunvisors and the
right front passenger’s safety
belt.
1
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
How the Air Bag System Works
The system checks the air bagelectrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-33
’ A CAUTION:
I
I
P
-
-
I
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept
clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything
on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-34
When should anair bag inflate?
What makes an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 k d h ) . The threshold level
can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is notdesigned to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers arelease of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger.
In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving’’ in theIndex for more tips on off-road driving.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
1-35
What will you see after anair bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that
some people may not even realize theair bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering
wheel hub for the driver’sair bag, or the instrument panel
-- will be hot for a short
for the right front passenger’s bag
time. The parts of the bag thatcome into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust corningfkom vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t preventthe driver from
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When anair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthmaor other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
as soon as it is safe to do so.
vehicle should get out
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after anair bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
1-36
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
e Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
e Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the airbag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system,
when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety
belt usage at deployment.
e Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bag system. Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may haveto replace the air
bag module inthe steering wheelor both the air
bag moduleand the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break the air bag coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water up to the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet, theair bag controller
can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air
bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to
replace the airbags as well as the sensors and related
parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood, orif it’s exposed
to water that soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless
repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately.
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow it, unless
the battery cables are first disconnected.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There areparts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
b
I
I
A FAUTION:
I -
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improperservice. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure theperson
performing work for you is qualifiedto do so.
~
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-37
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q:
if I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to
the front of my vehicle, will
it keep the air
bags from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached toyour vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Is there anythingI might add to the front of
the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal
or
height, they may keep the air bag systemfrom
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of theair bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistanceare in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)
1-38
Center PassengerPosition
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in thecenter positions.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulderbelt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-39
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rearseat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it gettwisted.
1-40
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on thelatch plate to make sure itis secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not longenough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-41
Four-door utility models and the second seat of
Suburbans have shoulder belt height adjusters. Move
the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is
right for you.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this
applies force tothe strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder
belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able totake belt
restraining forces.
The safetybelt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
To move the height adjuster down, push in at the
word PRESS and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. You can move the adjuster up
just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without pushing in to make sure ithas
locked into position.
Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose.In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, justpush the button on the buckle.
1-43
Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This featurewill provide added safety belt
comfort for children who
have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt,
the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat.To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults,the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulderbelts. Here's how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
I . Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of
the seatback.
1-44
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cordmust be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-45
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact,the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
:
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crossesthe shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guideonto the storage clip.
Make sure you remove the comfort guide fromthe belt
before you fold a rear seatdown or use an easy-entry
seat, if your vehicle has one.
1-46
I
Children who are upagainst, or very close to, any
air bagwhen it inflates canbe seriously injured
or killed. This is trueeven though yourvehicle
has reduced-force frontal air
bags. Air bags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for
adults, but not for
young children andinfants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its
air
bag system is designed for them.
Young children
and infants need the protection that
child
a
restraint system can provide.
Always secure
children properlyin your vehicle.
-4 CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a childor infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether itis
the right type andsize for your child. A very
young child’ship bonesare so small thata
regular belt might not stay
low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely
be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on thechild’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries.So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a childor infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support for
the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
crash forcescan be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This isso important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is
an infant restraint available forthe baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
1-47
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a babywill become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-48
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
Q.@What are the different types ofadd-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and
size, but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
An infant carbed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface.With an infant car bed,
make surethat the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-49
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seatscome in two parts -- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-50
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designedto help protect
children who are from20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four yearsof age. One type,a convertible
restraint, is designed tobe used either as a rear-facing
infant seator a forward-facing child seat.
1-51
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children
who are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight years of age. It’s designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-52
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant orchild
restraint will show you howto dothat. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rearrather than the front seat.
We at General Motors therefore recommend that you
put your child restraint in arear seat. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger
seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-force frontal air bags. This
is becausethe back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very closeto the inflating air
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right frontseat, but before youdo, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better tosecure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-53
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your GM dealer to put it in foryou. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you
how to do it.
1-54
Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strapif the child restraint has one. Be
sure to followthe instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint when
and as the instructionssay.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the
safety beltquickly if you ever had to.
1-55
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to workfor an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint ina Center
Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractorwhile you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure itis secure.
1-56
You’ll be using thelap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when andas the instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the beltas long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-57
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
To remove the child restraint, justunbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult orlarger
child passenger.
Securing aChild Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injured orkilled if the right front
passenger’s air baginflates, even though your
vehicle has reduced-force frontal airbags. This is
because the backof the rear-facing child
restraint would be veryclose to the inflatingair
bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-58
3. Pick up thelatch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put itbehind the child restraint.
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would beable tounbuckle the
safety beltquickly if you ever had to.
1-59
Larger Children
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-60
I
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.
e Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only oneperson at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be surethat the shoulder belt still is on thechild’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder beltis
still very close tothe child’s face or neck,you
might want to place thechild in a seat that has a
lap belt, if your vehicle hasone.
1-61
2-Door Utility and Suburban
1-62
,\ CAUTION:
Safety BeltExtender
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting
in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then beapplied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
But if a safety belt isn’t long
enough to fasten,your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take theheaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you,and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat itis made to fit. To wear it, just attach
it to the regular safety belt.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
L
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-63
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make surethe safety beltreminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose ordamaged safety belt system parts.If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job,have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a
belt istorn or frayed,get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced.(The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would
be if worn
during amore severe crash, then you neednew belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replaceair bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
&
NOTES
1-65
b%
NOTES
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here youcan learn about the many standard and optional featureson your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-3
2-6
2- 8
2- 10
2-11
2- 12
2- 12
2- 13
2- 15
2- 16
2- 19
2- 24
2-25
2-28
2-28
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Your Doors and How They Work
Theft
Passlock’
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into Park (P)
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-33
2-33
2-40
2-42
2-44
2-52
2-62
2-64
2-64
2-68
2-70
2-7 1
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
Windows
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Sun Visors
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
r
A CAUTION:
-
Leaving young childrenin a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. A child
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t
leave the keysin a vehicle with young children.
2-2
I
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. Whena door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
If you ever lose your key,your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining a new one.
--
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key.
2-3
From the inside, to lock the
door, slide the lever on your
door down.
To unlock the door, slide the
Power Door Locks
Press the side of the power
door lock switch marked
LOCK on either front door
to lock all the doors at once.
Press the ribbed side of the
switch to unlock all the
doors at once.
On four-door models, the manual switch on each rear
door works only that door’s lock. It won’t lock (or
unlock) all of the doors -- that’s a safety feature.
2-4
M
On the passenger side of the
rear cargodoor or tailgate,
there is a power lock switch
which can be used to lock or
unlock all of the doors.
On vehicles with cargo doors, if the rear cargo lock
switch ispressed with the cargo doors open,all of the
doors will lock five seconds after the cargo doorsare
closed. If the cargo doors are closed, the vehicle doors
will lock when a power door lock switch is pressed.
Child Security Locks(If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear side doorsso
they can’t be opened from
the inside by passengers.
Move the button up to engage the security feature.
Move thebutton down to return the door locks to
normal operation.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out,and
close thedoor.
2-5
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or your tailgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
Your interior lamps will be illuminated for a set period
of time when the transmitter signal is received by the
Keyless Entry System. In addition, your vehicle’s horn
will chirp if you press the LOCK button twice, to let you
know that the doors have locked.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subJect to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.
This devicecomplies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation issubject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work orif you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto
work, try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See the
instructions that follow.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.
The interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If you press this button again
within five seconds, all the remaining doors will unlock.
Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors.The interior
lamps will come on for two seconds as soonas all the
doors are closed. If you press the LOCK button twice the
horn will chirpto confirm that the doors are locked.
If you do not want the horn to chirp asa confirmation
that the doors have locked or unlocked, please consult
your dealer.
The rear cargo doors or tailgate glass will unlock
automatically when the REARbutton on the transmitter
is pressed twice within three seconds. If your vehicle is
equipped with a rear liftglass, pressing the REAR button
twice within three seconds will release the liftglass, but
only if the transmission selector is in PARK (P). The
interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour
dealer. When the dealermatches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will notunlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle canhave only four transmitters
matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should lastabout two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close toyour vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it’s probably time tochange the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfacesmay damage
the transmitter.
Use one three volt, type CR2032, or equivalent battery.
.
To replace the battery:
Synchronization
Synchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signaltwice to thereceiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This preventsanyone from recording and playingback
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least
five seconds. Thedoor locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Your Doors and How They Work
1. Insert a small coin, or flathead screwdriver, to
separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one,
making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is
facing down.
3. Snap the top and bottom together.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
2-8
Side Doors
To open the door from the outside, pull the handle up
and pull the door open.
To open the door from the inside, pull the lever toward
you and push the door open.
A CAUTION:
It canbe dangerous to drive with the tailgate
glass, tailgate or rear doors open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drivewith the tailgateglass, tailgate
or if electrical wiring or other
or rear doors open
cable connections mustpass through the seal
between the body and the tailgateglass, tailgate
or reardoors:
0 Make sure allwindows are shut.
Turn the fanon your heating or cooling
system to its highestspeed with the setting
on VENT. That will force outside air into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
0 If you have air outlets on or under the
way.
instrument panel, open them all the
See “Engine Exhaust’’ in the Index.
Tailgate Glass and Tailgate
If your vehicle has a tailgate, you must raise the rear
glass before loweringthe tailgate.
To open the glass from the outside, use your key. With
the key in the lock, turn the key to the right to release
the glass, then lift it up.
To release the glass from the inside, use the electric
tailgate glass release switch on the instrument panel.For
more information, see“Tailgate -- Electric Glass
Release” in the Index.
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
Close the tailgate before closing the rear glass. After
closing the tailgate, make sure the tailgate is securely
latched by pulling it toward you. After closing the rear
glass, pull up on its handleto make sure it is locked.
Panel Doors
To open the rear panel doors, you must open the
passenger’s side door first. If the door is locked,
insert your door key in the lock and turn it to the
left to unlock it.
To open the passenger’s side door, pull up on the handle
and pull the door open.
2-9
To open the driver’s side door, first open the passenger’s
side door. Then, pull the handle on the left door edge out
and pull the door open.
To close the doors, close the driver’s side door first.
After securely closing the door,close the passenger’s
side door. Make sure both doors are latched securely.
The rear doors have a check assembly to keep them
from fully opening during normal use.
To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put your
key in the lock and turn it to the right. If you have power
door locks, you can lock the side doors as well as the
rear doors from inside the vehicle. For more
information, see“Power Door Locks” in this section.
To fully open either rear door, you must release the
check strap. To release the check strap just:
I. Open the door partway until the white mark on the
check strap is fully outside thedoor edge. If the end
of the strap catches the pin on the door, the door is
open toofar.
2. Then, hold the strapat
the white mark, pull the
strap toward you and
open the door all
the way.
To re-engage the door check strap, just closethe door
and the strap will catch the pin.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing
we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joyriders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key out alsolocks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking atNight
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them ina storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But whatif you have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Passlock@
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system
is armed once the key is removed from the ignition.
Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned witha valid key. Ifa correct key is not used, fuel
is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off after the engine is started.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to releasethe key from the
START position as soon as the engine starts.
If you are driving and the SECURITY light comes on,
you will be able torestart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index). See your dealer
for service.
If the SECURITY light comes on while the engine is
running, a problem has been detected and the system
may need service. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
2-11
New Vehicle CLBreak-In”
Use your key to startyour vehicle. The key lets you turn
the ignition switch to five different positions.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speedat 55 mph (88 k m h ) o r
less for the first500 miles (805 km).
0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
2-12
Ignition Positions
C
--
A
L
E
ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. Push in the key and turnit toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was
before you inserted the key.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
I
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn thekey only with your hand.
Using a tool to forceit could break thekey or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see“Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
~
~~
Don’t try to shift to
PARK (P)if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle isstopped.
How to Start the Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
2-13
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe
drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start rightaway, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for fivemore
seconds, unless it startssooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts,let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
2-14
NOTICE:
Your engine is designedto work withthe
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how todo it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0°F (- 18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater
can help.
You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater electrical cord is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near
the power steering reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and
cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plugthe
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach,use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated
for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sureto unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer inthe area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-15
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle features an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument cluster.This display must be
powered anytime the shift lever is capableof being moved
out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF,
rather than LOCK, there will be a small current drain on
your battery which could discharge your battery over a
period of time. If you need to leave your key in the
ignition in OFF for an extended period for any reason, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cablefrom
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
2-16
It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unlessyou have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
(P).
move the shift lever PARK
to
If you have four-wheel drive, your
vehicle
will be free to roll even if your shift leveris in
PARK (P) if your transfer caseis in
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfercase is in
a drive gear,two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheellow (4L) not in
NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing
a Trailer” in theIndex.
--
--
--
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting toREVERSE (R)while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift toREVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N):In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N)when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (runningat high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
1 NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused
by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered
by your warranty.
2-17
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0):
This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 kmh), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
If you manually selectSECOND (2), the transmission will
drive in second gear.You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels whenyou are trying to start your
vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicleis
moving forward, thetransmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
(a)
can be used when
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, drivingon steep
hills or for off-road driving. You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD( 3 ) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help controlyour speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
2-18
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud or wereup against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on
a hill.
Four-wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Manual Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use 2-WHEEL HIGH(2H) for most normal
driving conditions.
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H)
or
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions fora long time
on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of
your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The transfer case shift leveris on the floor to the rightof
the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal. If the outside temperature is
very hot, or the vehicle has been used under hard driving
conditions, there may be a slight delay for the axle
to unlock.
2-19
An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer
case settings:
2-Wheel High (2H): This setting is for driving in most
street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
4-Wheel High (4H): This setting engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4H when you need
extra traction and in most off-road situations.
The front axleportion of the indicator diagram will light
up when YOU shift into four-wheel driveand the front
axle engages.
Shifting the transfer case to
NEUTRAL (N) can
cause yourvehicle to roll even
if the transmission
is inPARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case
in
NEUTRAL (N). See “Parking Brake”in
the Index.
Some delay between shifting intofour-wheel drive and
the indicator’s lighting is normal. If the front axlelight
does not go out immediately after you shift out of
four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system.
L
Neutral (N): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle
needs to be towed.
2-20
4-Wheel Low (4L): This setting also engages your front
axle to give you extra power and a higher driveline ratio.
This position shouldbe used only for off-road driving.
You can shift from 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) to 4-WHEEL
HIGH (4H) or from 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) to
2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) while the vehicle is moving.
Your front axle may engage faster if you take your foot
off the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. In
extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop or
slow the vehicle to shift into 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H).
To shift into or out of 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) or
N (NEUTRAL):
Remember that driving in 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) may reduce fuel economy. Also,
driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could
cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer
case harder to shift and run noisier.
When your headlamps or parking lamps are on, rotate
the thumb wheel next to the headlamp switch up to
brighten, and down to dim your transfer case
indicator light.
Automatic Transfer Case(If Equipped)
1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph
(2 to 5 kmdh) and shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one quick,
continuous motion.
Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the
transfer case into 4-WHEEL LOW (4L), or the gears
could clash.
2-21
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
I
I
Transfer Case Settings
1
I
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this moderesults in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
4HI:Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on
snowy or icy roadsor in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle.
4LO:This settingalso engages your front axle and
* See “Recreational VehicleTowing” or
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index
for further information.
The transfer caseswitches are below and to the left of
the climate controls. Use these switches to shift into
and
out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among four
driving settings:
2HI: This setting is used for drivingin most street and
highway situations. Your front axleis not engaged in
two-wheel drive. Thissetting also provides thebest
fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for usewhen road
conditions arevariable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
2-22
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are drivingoff-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
1Shifting the transfer case NEUTRAL
to
can
cause your vehicleto roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured.Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL.See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to neutral
only when towing your vehicle. See “Recreational
Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index
for more information.
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting youare
in. The indicator lights willcome on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lightsdo not
come on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the
transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is
complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WDlight stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in theIndex for further information.
Shifting to 4HIor AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This
can be done at any speed, and the indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the
shift is completed.
Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. Thiscan be done at
any speed.
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4L0, the vehicle’s engine must be running and
the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).The
(4.8 km/h)
preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and
release the 4LO switch.You must wait for the 4LO
indicator lightto stop flashing and remain illuminated
before shifting your transmission in gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator lightwill flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unlessyour
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to4H1, AUTO 4WD or 2HIyour
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 k m h ) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
the engine running. The preferred method for shifting
out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4H1, AUTO
4WD or2HI switch. You must wait for the 4H1, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashingand remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission intogear.
If the 4H1, AUTO 4WD or2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4H1, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but
will not complete the shift unless your vehicle ismoving
less than 3 mph (4.8 W h ) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting to Neutral
Shifting Outof Neutral
To shift the transfer case to neutral, first make sure the
vehicle isparked so that it will not roll:
To shift out of neutral:
1. Set the parking brake.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle.
2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI,4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. Thered NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to neutral
is complete.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transmission lever to the desired position.
After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the red light will go out.
Parking Brake
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for
one second, then shift the transmission to
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE @ for one second.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
If the ignition is on,the brake system warning light will
come on.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
2-24
To release the parking
brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down.
Pull the lever, located just
above the parking brake
pedal, marked BRAKE
RELEASE, to release the
parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them, andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That sectionshows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
It canbe dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fullyPARK
in
(P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle canroll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly.You or others could be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move,even
when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps
that follow. If you have four-wheel drive and
(N), your
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL
vehicle will be free toroll, even if your shift lever
is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in
a drive gear not in NEUTRAL(N). If you’re
pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
--
2-25
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set theparking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position
like this:
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
Pull the lever toward you.
2-26
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
A CAUTION:
- - It canbe dangerous to leave your
vehicle with the
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK(P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. If youhave
four-wheel drive and your transfer case
is in
NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle will be free toroll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK
(P). So be sure
the transfer case is ina drive gear not in
NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave thevehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat
and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured.
Don’t
leave your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
--
If you have to leaveyour vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you
move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shiftyour
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put toomuch force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever outof
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lockdoes occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take someof the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever outof PARK (P).
2-27
Shifting Out ofPARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock
system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system
fixed as soon as you can.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
Over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-28
Engine Exhaust
A CAUTION:
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high pointson the road or over
road debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it onlywith all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. Butif
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
A
CAUTLN:
Idling the enginewith the air system control off
could allow dangerous exhaust into yourvehicle
(see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if
the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be
a blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in the Index.)
--
--
2-29
Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped)
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re
on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll,even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be surethe transfer
case is in a drive gear-- not in NEUTRAL (N). Always
set your parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be
sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in theIndex.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-30
If you have this feature, your locking rear axle can give
you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or
gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Windows
Manual Windows
To open your manual windows, turn the hand crank on
each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
&Door Utility and Suburban
2-Door Utility
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the side doors.
The driver’sdoor has a switch for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned toACC or RUN.
Push the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Push the front of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raisethe window.
2-31
The electric hatch
release button lets you
release the tailgate glass.
To release the glass, press
the top of the button.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to belowered without
holding the switch. Press and hold the side of the
window switch marked AUTO for one second to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode canbe canceled at any time by pressing the
opposite side of the switch. To open the window
partway, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the
desired position.
If you have a four-door vehicle and power windows, the
power window switch has a lockout feature. This feature
prevents the rear windows from operating exceptfrom
the driver’sposition, when the front driver’s side switch
is in LOCK. When the switch is moved to NORM, the
rear power windows will operate again.
Electric Tailgate Glass Release
Before operating your electric tailgate glass release, see
the cautionunder “Your Doors and How They Work” in
this section.
Then, lift thewindow up to open.
The shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
for therelease to work.
There is also a power door lock switch at the rear of the
vehicle which will allow youto lock or unlock allof the
doors. See “Power Doors Locks” in the Index.
Horn
Push on the air bag module in the center of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
2-32
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level togive your
legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer
0
Windshield Wipers
0
Windshield Washer
0
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-33
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has twoupward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see“Fuses” in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.
When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you.
An arrow on the instrument
Then release it.
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
When the high beams are
lane change.
on, this light on the
instrument panel also will
be on.
To signal a lane change, just raise lower
or
the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever
will return by
itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down and the
arrow flashes at twice thenormal rate, a signal bulb
may be burned out and other drivers may not see your
turn signal.
2-34
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the knob
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the knob to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. Thewipers will
stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the
knob on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the knob tochoose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the knob to the
LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the knob
further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the knob
to OFF.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing
well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to
clear iceand snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen tothe windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers.The
windshield wiper motor is protectedfrom overload by a
If the motor overheatsdue to
circuit breaker and a fuse.
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc. may cause wiper linkage
damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the
windshield before using your windshield wipers.
2-35
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
The rear window
wipedwasher switch is on
your instrument panel, to
the right of the gage cluster.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the front windshield washer. If the fluid level is low in
the washer fluid bottle, you may not be able to wash
your rear window. If you can wash your windshield, but
not your rear window, check the fluid level.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the lever,
there’s a paddle with the
word PUSH on it. To
spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle.
To turn the wiper on, slidethe switch all the way up.
For delay wiping, slide the switch even with DELAY in
the center position of the rear wiper control. The wiper
will cycle every nine seconds.
To wash the window, push in on the switch. Window
washer fluid will continue to spray until the switch is
released. The wiper will continue with three more wipes
and then return to the setting that was chosen before the
lever was pushed.
2-36
In freezing weather, don’tuse your washer until
the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for a few seconds and then either stopor return
to the preset speed.
0
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors may adversely
affect windshield wiper and washer performance.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
0
With cruise control,
you can maintain a
speed of about 25 mph
(40 kmh) or more
without keeping your
foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply yourbrakes, cruise controlshuts off.
’
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you
can’t drive safelyat a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise,you might hita button
and go into cruise whenyou don’t want to. You
could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise control switchoff until you want to useit.
2-37
1. Move the cruise
control switch
to ON.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control.But you don’t need to reset it.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate)
for about half a second.
3. Push in the SET
button at the end of
the lever and
release it.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
2-38
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get tothe higher speed.
Push the SET button at theend of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise control switch from ON to WA.
Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. (To increase your speed
in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for
less than half a second. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
0
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, loadand the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the
steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop
more than 15 mph (24 kmh) below the set speed, your
cruise control will automatically disengage. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
2-39
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Exterior Lamps
Step lightly on the brake pedal or
Move the cruise control
switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Your parkingkeadlamp knob is on the driver’s side of
your instrument panel.
Rotate the knob to the right, to the parking lampsymbol,
to turn on the following:
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
Taillamps
2-40
0
License Plate Lamps
Headlamps-On Reminder
0
Instrument Panel Lights
A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on
and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. If
you need to useyour headlamps when the ignition
switch is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the buzzer
can be turned off by turning the thumb wheel next to the
parkingheadlamp switch all the way down.
Rotate the knob to the right again, to the master
lighting symbol, to turn on all the lamps listed as
well as the headlamps.
Rotate the knob to the left, to OFF, to turn off
your lamps.
Rotate the thumb wheel next to the knob up to adjust
instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up to
the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift
indicator LED display to full intensity when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on.To turn on the dome
lamps (with the vehicle doors closed)rotate the thumb
wheel up to the second notch position.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling on the turn signalhigh-beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to seethe front of your vehicle during theday.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when:
0
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
0
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be litup either.
2-41
When it begins to getdark, your DRL indicator lightis a
reminder to turn your headlamp switch on.The other
lamps that comeon with your headlamps willalso
come on.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
The instrument panel intensity control
is located next to
the parkingheadlamp switch. Rotate the thumb wheel up
to adjust the instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb
wheel up to the first notchto return the radio displayand
gear shift indicator LED display to full intensity when the
headlamps or parkinglamps are on. To turn on the dome
lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) rotate the thumb
wheel up to the second notch position.
2-42
Illuminated Entry
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated
entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome lamp button is in theout position. When
all doors are closed or the dome lamp button is pressed
in, the lamps will stay on for a short periodof time and
will then go out.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumb wheel, located next to the parkingheadlamps
switch knob, all the way up to the second notch. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the
doors are opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has
reading lamps, press the
button next to thelamp to
turn the lamp on.
The lamps can be
adjusted to point inthe
direction you want.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parkingheadlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doors are
opened, or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the
switch button once. With the switch button in this
position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors
are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation,
press the switch button again and return it to the “out”
position. With the button in this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open the door.
If your vehicle has an overhead console with reading
lamps, press the button next to the lamp to turn the
lamp on.
The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction
you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
2-43
Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside
rearview mirror.
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
Pull the tab under the mirror rearward to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
forward for normal daytime operation.
The mirror also includes an eight-point compass
display in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle isdriven.
2-44
I
Compass
Operation
Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds.After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2:
I
Compass Calibration
Mirror Operation
The right side of the switch located at the bottom of the
mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. The
AUTO LED will come on when the electrochromic
mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror on, press
and hold the MIRROR button for three seconds. The
mirror will darken and remain dark until the button is
released. To turn the mirror off, press and release the
MIRROR button.
If, after two seconds, the display doesnot show a
for North, for example),there
compass heading (“N”
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a
similar magnetic item. If the letter “C” should ever
appear in the compass window, the mirror may
need calibration.
2-45
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or
less until the display reads a direction, or
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust forcompass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2-46
I
4. Press the COMP button on the bottomof the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will
show a compass direction within a few seconds.
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature Display
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have electrochromic inside and
outside rearview mirrors.
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
Temperature Display
The mirror also includesa display in the upper rightcomer
of the mirror. This can be used as a compass or to indicate
outside air temperature.
The temperaturecan be displayed by pressing the TEMP
side of the switch. Pressing the TEMP switch once
briefly, will toggle thetemperature reading on and off.
To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, pressand hold the TEMP button for
three seconds until the display blinks Fo and C O . Press
and release the TEMP switch to toggle between the
Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After five seconds of
inactivity, the display will return to a normal
temperature reading.
2-47
The normal display will show a temperature reading in
degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. If an abnormal reading is
displayed, please consult your dealer.
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
The right side of the switch, labeled TEMP, located at
the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic inside
and outside mirrors on and off. An indicator light,
located to the right of the TEMP switch, will come on
when the electrochromic mirrors are turned on. To turn
the mirrors on, press and hold the TEMP button for
six seconds. To turn the mirrors off, press and hold
the TEMPbutton for six seconds. The indicator light
will turn off.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass
on oroff.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
If, after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (“N” for North, for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder ora
similar magnetic item. If the letter ‘X?’ should ever
appear in the compass window, the mirror may
need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or
less until the display reads a direction, or
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after
several turns the compass will become calibrated and
will display a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of
the mirror.
4. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in thedisplay.
After you stop pressing the button in, the displaywill
show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds
until a zone number appears in thedisplay.
Outside Manual Adjust Mirrors
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can justsee
the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Somemirrors can be folded in, to enter
narrow doorways.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and convex
add-on mirror attachments may adversely affect
mirror performance.
2-49
Camper Type Outside Mirrors
(If Equipped)
1. To adjust the mirrors when hauling a slide-in camper
or towing a trailer, rotate the mirror by pushing the
mirror head toward the front of the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the camper type
mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear
view of objects behind you.
2-50
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
If you have electricmirrors, they can be adjusted to
point where you want from inside the vehicle.
Select the mirror you want
to move by moving the
center of the switch, located
on the driver’s door armrest,
to L (left) or R (right).
2. Rotate the mirror head, so that the mirror surface
faces the rear of the vehicle.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where
you want it.
2-51
Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
These outsiderearview mirrors feature an auto-dimming
and defrost mode.
To turn on the auto-dimming feature, press and hold the
inside rearview mirror TEMP button for six seconds.
See “Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display” earlier in this
section for further information.
~
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look fartheraway than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hita vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
To turn on the defrost feature,press the rear window
defrost button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for further information.
Storage Compartments
Convex Outside Mirror
Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments
designed to store small items.
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Glove Box
To open your glove box, move the switch button toward
the passenger’s side and pull the door open.
Center Overhead Console(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an overhead console. It has
storage compartments inside it. Your vehicle may also
have a Universal Transmitter, see “Universal
Transmitter” later inthis section.
2-52
Installing a GarageDoor Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
compartment can be usedto conveniently store the opener.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the release
button forward.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch. Press it
firmly tothe back of
your garage door opener,
as close tothe center of
the opener as possible.
3. Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button, and press the opener firmly
into place.
The pegs inside the compartment door areused to
make sure the button on the compartment door will
contact the control button on the garage door opener.
4. Add one peg at a time
until the PUSH button on
the closed compartment
door operates thegarage
door opener.
2-53
I
5. Now, with the
compartment door
closed, push the
button marked
PUSH to make
sure the garage
door opener
operates properly.
Sunglasses Compartment
The centeroverhead compartment can be used to
conveniently store your sunglasses.
I
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only
have to push the PUSH button slightly to operate
the opener.
6. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and
add orremove pegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly.
To open the centercompartment, press the release
button located at the rear of the compartment door.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
2-54
Rear Compartment
Center Floor Console (If Equipped)
The rear compartment can be used to store a small item,
like a book.
Your vehicle may have a consolecompartment between
the bucket seats.
To open the rear compartment, press the release button
located at the rear of the compartment door.
Instrument Panel Cupholder
Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the
instrument panel.
To close the cupholder,
slide it back into the
instrument panel.
To open it, lift the latch handle and swing the door open.
2-55
2-56
Your console also has a
cupholder that swings out
for the back seat passengers
to use.
Your vehicle may have a
memo holder attached to the
front of the console. Use it
to hold pads of paper or
similar items.
There is alsoa drawer that
slides outfrom the bottom
of the console.
Your vehicle may have a
cassette/compact disc holder
at the front of the console.
The holder will store up to
four compact disc cases, up
to four cassette tape cases,
or any combination of these
items that adds up to four.
The cassettekompact disc
holder can be removed and
replaced with a cupholder
that is located in the center
console storage area.
Armrest Storage Compartment
(If Equipped)
To remove the cassettekompact disc holder, pull the
front of the holder toward youand then lift it up.
To insert the cupholder,
place it in the console.
Engage the rear tabs first
and then press the front
portion in place.
Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage
compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storagecompartment has a cassette/compact disc
holder. The holder will store up to five compact disc
cases and up to six cassette tape cases.
2-57
Other Storage Compartments
Your vehicle includes a number of storage
compartments for storage of often-used items.
Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument
panel. Use these spaces for items such as gloves or
small books.
Some models have a storage pocket oneach of the
front doors.You can use the pocket to store a variety of
small items.
4-Door Utility Rear Storage Compartment
The storage compartment also has a folding writing
table on the top of the armrest lid.
To use thewriting table, pull the latch at the rear of the
table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to
hold
pads of paper and a pen.
2-58
If you have a four-door utility model, it has a storage
compartment located in the rear cargo area of the
vehicle, in the driver’s side trim panel.
To open the compartment, press down on the release
latches and swing the compartment door open.
When closing the compartment, press both latches down
and move the door to the closed position.
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
If you have a convenience net, it is stored in a pouch
attached to the spare tire.
Cargo Security Shade
( 4 - h Utility
~
Model)
I
r
An improperly storedcargo cover couldbe
thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or
sudden maneuver.You or others could be
it
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
outside of the vehicle. When you put back,
it
always be sure that it
is securely reattached.
If you have a cargo security shade, you can use it to
of your vehicle.
cover items in the cargo area
To use the shade, pull the shade handle toward the rear
of the vehicle. Latch the shade posts into the retaining
sockets on the cargo area trim
panels.
To return the shade to the shadeholder, pull up on the
shade handle to release theshade posts from the
retaining sockets. Let the shademove forward and latch
the shade posts into the front-most retaining sockets.
To remove the shade from the vehicle, first let the shade
go all theway into the holder. Then, push the shade
holder toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Lift
the shade up on the driver’s side, swing the shade
rearward and take it outof the vehicle.
2-59
Cargo Tie Downs
There are cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow
you to strapcargo in
and keep it from
moving inside
To put the shade in the vehicle,first make sure the shade
slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface
facing down. Then, hold the shade at an angle and place
the shadeholder tab into theslot in the passenger’s side
trim panel.Move the other end of the shade forward and
hold it next to the driver’s sidetrim panel slot.
Push the shade holder toward the passenger’s side of the
vehicle and place the tab in thedriver’s side trim panel
slot. Make sure the tabgoes all the way in the slot.
Lightly pull on the shade holder to make sure it is secure.
Then, pull the shade to the desired position and securethe
shade posts in the appropriate retaining sockets.
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of
the way.
Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)
If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to
the roof, and crossrails which can be moved toward the
front or the rear in the side rails to help securecargo. Tie
the load to the side rails or siderail supports.
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than
200 lbs.
(90.6 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carrylarge things, never
let them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. Load your cargoso that it restson the
slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
0
If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind the
rear sidedoor on Suburbans). If you need to, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and side rails to spreadthe load. If plywood is used,
tie it to the side rail supports.
e Tie the load tothe crossrails or the side rail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
a If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go.Tie the load to the
crossrails and the side rails or side rail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the loadso
tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
2-61
For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate
the frontcrossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches
(46 cm to 58 cm) rearward of the front supports.
After moving the crossrails, be sure to tighten all the
slider screws.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the tailgate glass or above
the
rear loaddoors.
If items areloaded on the roof of the vehicle,
care shouldbe taken notto block or damage the
CHMSL unit.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Front Ashtray
The frontashtray is located atthe bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull on the notch in the ashtraydoor to
open it.
NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn in
your ashtrays, they could
be set on fireby
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
Do
cause a fireand possibly damage your vehicle.
not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring
and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray,
place thebottom part of the ashtray on the pivot bar at
the bottom of its mounting onthe instrument panel.
Then rotatethe ashtray back toits original position.
Rear Ashtray
Accessory Power Outlets
To use a rear ashtray, if you have them, pull at the top of
the ashtray door to flip the door open.
To remove a rear ashtray,press down on the inside tabs
and open the door fully.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s done heating, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter
in with your hand
while it is heating canmake it overload,
damaging the lighter and the heating element.
Just push the lighterall the way in and let go.
When it’s done heating,
it will pop backby itself.
Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the
cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile
telephones or other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems.
2-63
Sun Visors
Universal Transmitter (If Equipped)
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them out to help block glare at the front
and side windows.
Your visor may have a strap to hold small items,
such as maps.
Some visorshave an extender on the insideedge. When
the visor is down, pull the extender out for extra glare
coverage at the front or side.
Some visors have mirrors with lights. If the mirror has
lights, they will come on when you lift the mirror cover.
This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters.
It will operate garagedoors and gates, or with the
accessory package, other devices controlled by
radio frequencysuch as home/office lighting and
security systems.
The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies
of most current transmitters and is poweredby your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
2-64
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by otherthan
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the transmitter with any garage door opener
that does nothave the “stop and reverse” feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should beturned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels.
1. If you have not previously programmed a universal
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the red light begins toflash rapidly
(approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settings for all three channels.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that
you can still seethe red light.
3. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Using both hands, press the hand-held
transmitter button and the desired button on the
universal transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing, which could take up to 90 seconds,
indicates that the universal transmitter hasbeen
programmed. Release both buttons once the light
starts flashing rapidly.
2-65
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end
over end
and try again. Theuniversal transmitter may not work
with older garage door openersthat do not meet current
Federal Consumer Safety Standards.If you cannot
program the transmitter afterrepeated attempts, consult
your GM dealer.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in case
you need to erase and reprogram the universal transmitter.
Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriatebutton on the universal
transmitter. The red light comeson while the signalis
being transmitted.
Note that the effective transmission range of the
universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held
transmitter and from one channelto another.
2-66
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outsidebuttons until the redlight begins to flash.
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedure for programming the
transmitter explainedearlier.
Training a Garage Opener with a “Rolling
Code” Feature
If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the
garage door will not open, andif your garage door opener
was manufactured after1995, your garage door may have
of your garage
a security feature that changes the “code”
door opener every time it is opened or closed.
To determine if your garage door opener has this
“rolling code” feature,press the appropriate button on
the universal transmitter that was programmed.If the
red light flashesrapidly for one to two seconds, then
turns solid,your garage door opener has thisfeature.
To program a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, do the following:
6. Release the button, then press it again to c o n f i i that it
was programmedto the garage dooropener receiver.
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal
transmitter by following the steps provided under
“Programming the Transmitter” earlierin this section.
You may now use eitherthe universal transmitter or the
hand-held transmitter toopen your garage door. If you
still have difficulty in programming and require
assistance, please call 1-800-355-3515.
2. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
receiver. It is located near the garage door opener motor. Accessories
3. Locate the training button on the garage dooropener
receiver. The exact location and color will vary
among brands.
Accessories for the universal transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information,please call 1-800-355-35 15.
4. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for one to two seconds.
5. Return to your vehicle and press the programmed
button on the universal transmitter until the red light
flashes rapidly (about two seconds).
2-67
Instrument Panel
2-68
A. Dome Lamp Switch
B. Lamp Controls
C. Air Outlets
D. Multifunction Lever
E. Instrument Cluster
E Gearshift Lever
G.Audio System
H. Comfort Control System
I. Glove Box
J. Ashtray
K. Cupholder
L. Auxiliary Power Outlets
M. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player,
(If Equipped)
N. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped)
0. Automatic Transfer Case Switch (If Equipped)
P. Tilt Lever (If Equipped)
Q. Parking Brake Release
R. Hood Release
S. Fuse Block
2-69
Instrument Cluster
CHECX
GAGES
AIR
BAG
ANTI LOCK
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
l o l o l o l o l TRIP
loo 0 0 00101
APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK
United States version shown, Canadian similar
Your instrument clusteris designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how
fast you're
going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you'll need
to know to drive safelyand economically.
2-70
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers
(used inCanada).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Tamper-Resistant Odometer
Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will
show silverlines between the numbers if someone tries
to turn itback.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure
that must be followed, so check with your state or
provincial vehicle registrationoffice. But generally, if
the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer, thenit must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set
at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to
show the oldmileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout. If the reset
button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer may not go
all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to
press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or
others from injury.
2-71
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine justto let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages canindicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to letyou know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows
there may be a problem,check the section that tells you
what to doabout it. Please followthis manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairscan be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get toknow your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on forabout eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
2-72
The safety belt light
will also come on and stay
on for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor thelight
will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bagmodule,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in
the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for afew
seconds. Then the light
should go out. Thismeans
the system is ready.
If the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving,your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for afew
seconds when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixedso it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Warning Light
The charging system
warning light should come
on briefly when you turn on
the ignition, before starting
the engine, as a check to
show you it is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive ashort distance with this light on,it
helps toturn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and the airconditioner.
2-73
Voltmeter
19
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in the RUN position, this
gage shows your battery’s
state of charge in DC volts.
You can only drivefor a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in eitherwarning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake SystemWarning Light
When the engine is running,
the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicleand the engine is left at an idle foran
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full
power at
engine idle.As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow thecharging system to createmaximum power.
2-74
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one partisn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it
doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
BRAKE
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer tothe floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in theIndex.)
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light
is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
ANTI LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this lightwill come
on when you start your
engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on,you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixedso it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-75
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine)
I
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) orless. If you are pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 260”F( 160”C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260”F(160°C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
The “Problems on the Road,” section of this
manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
2-76
I
Your vehicle is equipped
_ _
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and
emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicatethat there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
If the Light Is Flashing
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as
good and your engine may notrun as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as acheck to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash,
when it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle.Find a safeplace to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle toyour
dealer or qualifiedservice center for service.
2-77
If the LightIs On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able tocorrect the emissionsystem
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel
your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle intogear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration orstumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel intoyour vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap,making sure tofully install
the cap. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fuel
cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel capwill allow fuel to evaporate intothe
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drivethrough a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electricalsystem
dries out.A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts torun out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since smallamounts of
air are sucked into the fuel line causinga misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel shouldcorrect this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel capproperly. It
will takea few driving trips to turn the light off.
2-78
If you experience oneor more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer orqualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Oil Pressure Gage
0
\\
i
l
m-
80
The oil pressure gage shows
the engine oil pressure in psi
(pounds per square inch)
when the engine isrunning.
Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary withengine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or otherproblem causing low
oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
a CAUTIOl
,:
Don't keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could beburned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costlyand is not covered by
your warranty.
2-79
Security Light
SECURITY
This lightwill come on
briefly when you turn the
key to START.
The light will stay on until the engine starts.If the light
flashes, thePasslock@System has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails tostart, see "Passlock" in
the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while drivingand
stays on,there may be a problem with the Passlock
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your GM dealer.
Service Four-wheel Drive Warning Light
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Automatic
Four-Wheel-Drive Transfer Case, it has a computer
which controls thefour-wheel-drive system.
SERVICE
4WD
This light should come on
briefly when you turnon the
ignition, as a check to show
you it is working.
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the Automatic
Four-Wheel-Drive system and service is required.
Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent, which may prevent serious damage
to the vehicle. This system is also designed to assist
your service technician in correctly diagnosing
a malfunction.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light will go on
whenever the DRL are on.
When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator light is a
reminder to turn on your headlamps.
Check Gages Light
CHECK
GAGES
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
Headlamp High-Beam Indicator Light
The high-beam indicator is
on whenever you use your
high-beam headlamps. For
more details about high
beams, see “Headlamp
High/Low-Beam Changer”
earlier in this section.
Turn Signal and Lane Change
Indicator Lights
The signal indicatorwill
come on whenever you
signal aturn or lane change.
See “Turn Signal and Lane
Change Indicator” earlierin
this section.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be
a problem with your oilpressure, coolant temperature,
or some other problem. Check your various gages to see
if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your
vehicle serviced right away.
2-81
Fuel Gage
1
0
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or lessthan half the tank’s capacityto fill
the tank.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
1 When the ignition is on, the
fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have
left inyour tank.
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
None of these indicatea problem with the fuelgage.
J
I
The gage will first indicateEMPTY (E) before you are
out of fuel, and you should getmore fuel assoon
as possible.
Listed are four situationsyou may experience with your
fuel gage:
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
2-82
For information on how to fill your fuel tank,
see “Fuel -- Filling Your Tank” in the Index.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Fuel -- Tank Capacity”
in the Index.
For the diesel enginefuel gage, see your Diesel
Engine Supplement.
$&
NOTES
2-83
NOTES
2-84
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operatethe comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-4
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3- 10
3-10
3- 10
3- 10
3- 12
Comfort Controls
Rear Comfort Controls (If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging andDefrosting
Rear WindowDefogger (If Equipped)
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo Radio
Playing the Radio
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
3- 14
3-18
3- 19
3-23
3-24
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-29
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
CD Adapter Kit
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Playerand
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Heater Control System
the relative air temperature independently of the
function knob setting. Move the knob to the right toward
the red area for warmer air. Movethe knob to the left
toward the blue areafor cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob
can be placed in any position between any two mode
settings to blend the flow of air.
+e
#
VENT This setting directs air through the
instrument panel outlets.
+’
=be
+
VENT/HEAT
’Use this setting to divide aifflow
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controlsthe fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing intothe passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
3-2
between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs air through the
floor outlets.
w.
+#DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater
outlets and toward the windshield.
DEFROST This setting directs air toward
the windshield.
Heater and Air Conditioning Control
System (If Equipped)
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
the relative air temperature independently of the function
knob setting. Move the knob to the right toward the red
area for warmer air. Movethe knob to the left toward the
blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob
can be placed in any position between any two mode
settings to blend the flow of air.
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move theknob to OFF. If you have the air
conditioner on, moving the fan knob to OFF also turns
off the A/C compressor.
While driving with the fan knob in OFF, ram airflow
will vent to thefloor outlets. The mode knob will not
redirect ram airflow to other selected outlet positions.
This is a normal operation for the OFF position.
+a
/J VENT This setting directs air through the
instrument panel outlets.
+’
+a
+
VENT/HEAT
’Use this setting to divide airflow
between the floor outletsand instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs air through the
floor outlets.
w.
$ ’ , DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater
outlets and toward the windshield.
9 DEFROST This setting directs air toward
the windshield.
3-3
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has one of these systems, you can
increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents.
Depending on the system you have and the setting
selected, you can send cooled orheated air to the rear of
the vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning (Without Rear Heater)
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has rear air conditioning(without rear
heater), the controls are located above the front and
second seats. The front and rear overhead controls let
you increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents.
To operate the rear system using the front control, just
turn the knob to the blower position you want.
To operate the rear air conditioning system, the front air
conditioning system must be on. With the front air
conditioning system off, the rear system controls can be
used to only circulate air in the rearof the vehicle.
To use the rear control, first turn the front control knob
to REAR CNTL. Then, the rear control can be used to
increase and decrease the airflow.
3-4
Rear Heater (Without Rear Air Conditioning)
(If Equipped)
If you have a rear heater
(without rear air
conditioning), the control
switch is located on the
instrument panel.
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning and rear
heater system combination, controls are provided to
regulate speed of the airflow, location and temperature.
To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to the
rear floor vents, move the switch marked REAR HEAT
to the blower speed you want.
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan
control
The knob has three speed positions. To increase the flow
of heated air, move the switch toward HIGH. To
decrease the flow of heated air, move it toward LOW. TO
turn the fan off,
move the switch to OFF.
on the left side of the control panel to the desired
blower setting.
To activate the rear control, move the fan knob on the
front control to REAR CNTL.
knob
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the center knob
on the control panel. Turn the knob to the right for floor
vent airflow or to the left for headliner vent airflow.
3-5
Generally, the upper vents are used for air conditioning
and the floor vents for heating. The control knobcan be
set to any blend setting.
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the right of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob tothe right toward the red,
and for coolerair, turn the knob to the left.
The rear controlworks just like the front control. Itwill
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls as
they desire.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
air inside escape. This
reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windowsclosed
for the air conditionerto work its best.
The recirculation button, between the fan and
temperature knobs, allows the air inside your vehicle to
be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’sfuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest and
can be used to keep unwanted odors and/or dust from
entering the vehicle. When using the air conditioner,
turn off recirculation after the vehicle reaches a
comfortable interior temperature. When the rightknob
on the control panel is between HEATER and
DEFROST, the recirculation feature will notfunction.
The A/C button, between the temperature and mode
knobs, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be
cooled. Thissetting is useful for normal cooling on hot
days. When you use A/C with the recirculation button
pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle
reaches a comfortable interior temperature.
With the A/C on, move the temperature knob toMAX
for maximum cooling. This setting also puts the system
in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest. After
the vehicle’sinterior reaches a comfortable temperature,
move the temperature knob to the right to placethe air
conditioning system in the normal mode.
Heating
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER or
VENTPHEAT setting with the temperature knob in the
red area.
If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your
engine in cold weather, 20 O F (-8 C) or lower, your
heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat
the passenger compartment in cold weather.
O
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the
side windows closed, airwill flow into the front air
inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air
exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enterthe vehicle when the heater or
the air conditioning fanis running, unless you have the
recirculation button pushed in. For more information on
the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier
in this section.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reducesthe
time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating
temperature, and shortens the time it takes theheater to
reach full output. For more information, see “Engine
Coolant Heater” in the Index.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
Your vehicle has air outlets inthe center and on the sides
of your instrument panel. You can move the outlets from
side-to-side orup and down to direct the flow of air, or
close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet, it
will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets
that areopen. These outlets do not completely shutoff
airflow when in a closed vent position.
3-8
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turnthe
blower fan toHI for a few moments before driving.
This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. Thishelps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
0
The useof hood air deflectors may adversely
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the
windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to
remove fog or icefrom the windshield in extremely
humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the
temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control
toward HI.
Rear Window Defogger(If Equipped)
If you see lines running across the rear window, you
have a rear window defogger.The lines warm the glass.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
next to the fan control knob.
The rear window defogger
will only work if the
ignition switch is turned
to RUN. For best results,
first clear the window of
as much snow or ice
as possible.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional heated
outside rearview mirrors, the rear window defogger
button will activate the rear window defogger and the
heated outside rearview mirrors.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
I
The defogger will shut itselfoff after several minutes. If
you need additionalwarming time, press the button
again. You can turn thedefogger off at any time by
pressing the button.
3-9
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operateeasily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first.Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operateall its
controls, tobe sure you’re getting the most out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press andhold HR until the correct hour appears onthe
display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clockwith the
ignition off, press RECALL or HFUMN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clockgoes into the
time-set mode.
3-10
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knobturns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
Finding aStation
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The displayshows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lowerknob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow totune to the next higher
station andthe left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and staythere.
SCAN: Press both SEEKbuttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light upon the
display. Press the right arrow totune in the next higher
station and press the leftarrow to tune to the next lower
station. PressVOLUME or both SEEK buttons to
stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the sametime, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, thestation you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increaseor
decrease bass.
3. Tune in the desired station.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble.If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
4. Press SET. (SET willappear on the display.)
Adjusting the Speakers
5. Press and hold oneof the four pushbuttons within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
BAL: Turn the controlbehind the upper knob to move
the sound to theleft or right speakers. Themiddle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. Themiddle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3-11
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Finding aStatim
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up
to 21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and
seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
Playing the Radio
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls thevolume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to
decrease volume.
3. Tune in the desired station.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
3-12
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons within
five seconds.Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scanthrough each
of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and playeach preset station stored on your pushbuttons
for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations.
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the controlbehind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left orright speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the controlbehind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape player isbuilt to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stopthe
tape and play the radio.
3-13
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
Playing the Radio
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radiowill display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it tothe left todecrease volume. The knob is capable of
being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-14
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make upfor road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as youdrive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into itsstored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan
through your favorite stations stored on your
pushbuttons. Selecteither the AM, FMl or FM2mode
and then press P. SCAN. It will scan through each
station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for afew
seconds beforecontinuing to scan through all of the
pushbuttons. Press P. SCAN again or one of the
pushbuttons to stopscanning to listen to a specific preset
station. P. SCAN will light up on the display while in
this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton
is too weak for thelocation you are in, the radio display
will show the channel number (PI -P6) for several
seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from
its stored position. Turn the knob to the right to
increase bassand to the left to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
3-15
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
Adjusting the Speakers
stored position. Turn the knob to the right to increase
treble and to the left to decrease treble. When the TREB
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control to the right to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and to the left for the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(CountryNestern) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS
or TREBcontrol is rotated, the AUTO TONEdisplay
will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
3-16
stored position. Turn the control to the right to adjust
sound to the right speakers and to the left to adjust
sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances
the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignitionoff, press EJECT or
RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition is on
but the radiois off, the tape will begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS andTREB controls just as you do
for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will
be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for thenext selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection.The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The
sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette oruntil you press REV
again. The radiowill play the lastselected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow willblink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
00 (5): Press this button to
reduce cassette tapenoise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
3-17
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the endof the cassette oruntil you press FWD again.
The radiowill play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tapedirection arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button toreturn to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape isin
the activemode.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off.To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player’’ inthe Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on.
Turn your radio off. Press TAPE AUX and holdfor
three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in
the display will flash for two seconds indicating the
feature is active. Insert the adapter cassette. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-18
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The displaywill show your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn this knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capableof
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio isplaying, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV: Your system has a featurecalled
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations,Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
3-19
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return toyour favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to selectthe band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting
you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stopfor a few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanningto listen
to a specific stored station.P.SCAN will light upon the
display while inthis mode, If one of the stations storedon
a pushbutton is too weakfor the locationyou are in, the
r d o display will showthe channel number(PI-P6) for
several seconds before advancingto the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from
its storedposition. Turn the knob to the right to increase
bass and to the left todecrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
TREB: Press lightlyon this knob to release it from its
stored position.Turn the knob to the right to increase
treble and to theleft to decrease treble. When the TREB
control isrotated, the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may wantto
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalizationsettings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(CountryNestern) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press ,and release this button until the AUTO
TONE displaygoes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a BASS
or TREB control isrotated, the AUTO TONEdisplay
will go blank. UsePUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob torelease it from its
stored position. Turn the control to the right to adjust
sound to the right speakers and to the left to adjust
sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances
the soundbetween the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knobto release it from its
stored position. Turn thecontrol tothe right to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and to the left for the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re notusing them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(Please note that you can also turn the system on when
you insert a compact disc into the player with the
ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player willpull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play.CD and a CD symbol will also appearon
the display.Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be nextto the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could bethat:
You are driving ona very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
0
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL tomake ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for theprevious selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for thenext selection. If you hold this buttonor
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next tracknumber will appear on thedisplay. Sound
is muted in thismode.
3-21
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selectionplay at
high speed while you press the REV button. Thisallows
you to listenand find out when the disc is at thedesired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selectionplay at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listenand find outwhen the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to seewhat track isplaying.
Press it againwithin five seconds to seehow long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed inminutes and tenths of a second. Thetrack
number will also appearwhen a new track beginsto
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
3-22
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and theradio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. Whena disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the pointwhere
it stopped.)
EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
compact disc is leftsitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If you have this option, youcan play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side upand insert it carefully into the player
(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be
pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition
is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and
begin playing theCD. It is possible to load and unload
CDs withthe ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, pressthe EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
A disc that hasbeen ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be
pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
0
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start
of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press PREV again to go to the previous track on
the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
3-23
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find thecorrect passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quicklyadvance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed tohelp you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go
back to thestart of the currenttrack. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enterthe random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while inthe random mode, the previous or next track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return tonormal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to seehow long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts toplay, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
3-24
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECR Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc.
Theft-Deterrent Feature(If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK” is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed. Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK if
THEFTLOCK is displayed on the front of the radio.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be usedor
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio isnot protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC toindicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enteryour
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The displaywill show REP to letyou know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition isturned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After
a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again tomake the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with yourcode.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or twodigits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
3-25
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignitionon before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter
the
correct codebefore INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contactyour dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the lasttwo digits agree
with your code.
3-26
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret codeyou have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radiowill remain secureduntil the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed andlater applied to a
secured radio, theradio won’t turn on andLOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
To help avoid hearing loss ordamage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important todo it properly. Addedsound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, DelcoElectronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
--
--
3-27
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but youshould clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-28
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette toeject while
cleaning because your unit is equipped with a cut tape
detection feature and some cleaning cassettes may
appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
If your vehicle is equipped with theAM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REVand
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.The
tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that
the cut tape detections feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn theignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for
five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radiowill
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
is in
degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape
good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective casesand away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from thecenter to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edgesor the
edge of the holeand the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact DiscPlayer
The use of CD lens cleanerdiscs is not advised, dueto
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure themast is still
tightened to the cowl.
3-29
@% NOTES
3-30
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about drivingon different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-5
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-11
4- 13
4- 14
4-28
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Driving at Night
4-30
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-4 1
4-43
4-45
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hills and Mountains
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-1
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
a
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
.
”..
..
.
Defensive Driving
The best adviceanyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please startwith a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
I
Defensive driving requires that
a driver concentrate on the
driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating ona cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor-- makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause
a collision, with resulting injury. Aska passenger to help
do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place todo
them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques
could save yourlife.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s thenumber one contributor to the
highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve thishighway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive.But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive?It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0
Judgment
The amount of alcohol consumed
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
0
Attentiveness.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drinkalcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer inan hour will end upwith a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
man of her same body weight wheneach has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC levelof
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer.What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving
is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand
judgment canbe affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
a driver
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with
who has been drinking. Ride home aincab; orif
you’re with a group, designatea driver whowill
not drink.
--
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
--
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to askmore of those control systemsthan the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 314 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pumpyour brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assistis
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
ANTI LOCK
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light’’ in
the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stoprolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. Thecomputer is
programmed to make the most of available tireand
road conditions.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot upto the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply yourbrakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in
two-wheel drive orfour-wheel drive.
Braking in Emergencies
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. Inmany emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops orthe system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much moreeffort.
Speed Sensitive Steering
This system varies theamount of steering effort
proportionate to yourvehicle speed. Steering is easier at
lower speedsfor maneuvering and parking ease. As your
vehicle speedincreases, the steering effort also
increases. At highway speeds, the amount of steering
effort is increased for vehicle control and stability.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to takecurves at areasonable speed.
A lot of the“driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’swhy:
Experienced driveror beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physicswhen driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertiawill keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can getin a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
whch the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve. Thenyou
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden accelerationcan demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
favorable conditionsyou’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, doit before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjustyour speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable,steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into thestraightaway.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls
out fromnowhere, or a child darts outfrom between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid theseproblems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasiveaction -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. Firstapply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in thissection.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes
back into theright lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupiesthe same lane asoncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to facewith the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level ofthe shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy, Easeoff the
so
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement.You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Thenturn your
steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicatesit’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching trafTic.
4-11
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following alarger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate spaceif the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance topass is coming up,
start to acceleratebut stay in the right laneand don’t
get too close.Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes move
to into the
other lane. If the way is clearto pass, you will have a
“running start”that more than makes up forthe
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop backagain and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars arelined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out topass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over
your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-12
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane topass. When you arefar enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember thatif
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to befarther away from you
than it really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, may
it
be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get aheadof you. Perhaps you
can ease alittle to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what drivingexperts say about what
happens when the three control systems(brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seekan escape route orarea of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited toexisting conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steeringin a curve causes tires to slip
and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If your vehicle starts to slide,ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or othermaterial is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surfacewith reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including enginebraking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to
make a “mirroredsurface” -- and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.
4-13
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive,you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does
have some definite hazards. The greatestof these isthe
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are noroad signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. Thesewill help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
4-14
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure tohave all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure
you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough
fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they should be? What are the local laws that
apply to off-roadingwhere you’ll be driving? If you
don’t know, you should check with law enforcement
people in the area.Will you be on someone’sprivate
land? If so, be sure toget the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to loadyour vehicle.
0
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
A CAUTION:
e Cargo on theload floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a suddenstop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the topof the seatbacks.
e Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
e Heavy loads on theroof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it morelikely to
roll over. You can be seriouslyor fatally
injured if the vehicle rollsover. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
area as far forward
Keep cargo in the cargo
and low as possible.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
0
Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in theIndex.
4-15
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to getbad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some thingsto
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
It’s also a good idea totravel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other
can helpquickly.
you have less time to react.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sureto read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice inan area that’s safe and
close to home before
you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to differentkinds of signals. Your
eyes, forexample, need to constantlysweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
4-16
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
A CAUTION:
I
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash.So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take youover many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and
its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Sutfiace Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or
ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration
and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending
upon the kind of surface you areon, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,
poor traction and longer braking distances.
S u ~ a c eObstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startleyou
if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles
are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and
fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things
to consider:
0
Is the path ahead clear?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
0
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s
more discussionof these subjects later.)
0
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface featurescan jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicleas
well or atall.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden bralung.
In away, off-road driving requires a different kindof
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your owngood judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-17
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takesyou up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle canand can’t do.
There aresome hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see thisbecause the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
I
a Is there a constant incline, or does the hillget sharply
steeper in places?
a Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If
you drive up them, you will stall.If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you
will roll over. You could be
If you have any doubt
seriously injured or killed.
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
surface causetire slipping?
a Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
a Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
a What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decideif it’s one
of thosehills that’s just too steep to climb,
descend or
cross. Steepnesscan be hard to judge. Ona very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
4-18
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
a Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
0
0
0
Use a low gear and get a firm gripon the
steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
A CAUTION:
Wrning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving uphills,
always try to go straight up.
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
0
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.
A CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest)
of a hill at full speed can
a drop-off,
cause an accident. There could be
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
4-19
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able totell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far tothe left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, andI can’t make itup the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
0
0
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
Here are some things you must nut do if you stall, or are
about to stall,when going up a hill.
0
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R),release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
0
4-20
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t makeit up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
&:
A:
Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t do it. What
should I do?
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn offthe engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case toNEUTRAL (N) when you leave thevehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
&!L CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N)
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is inPARK (P). This is because the
NEUTRAL (N) position onthe transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone else
could beinjured. If you are going to leave your
vehicle, set the parking brake andshift the
transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift the
transfer case to theNEUTRAL (N) position.
Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel, 4 High or
4 Low position.
4-21
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider anumber of things:
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then trytc
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a lou
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to doall the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
0
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-22
Heavy brakingwhen going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause lossof control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
12.’ Are there some thingsI should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
0
0
Qt Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose controland have a
serious accident.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straightdown.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
0
Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
0
Shift back toa low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
0
If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
4-23
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
0
0
A hill that can bedriven straight up ordown may be
too steep to drive across.
When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end.But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distancebetween
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide ora rollover.
Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
4-24
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have
to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
~
Driving acrossan incline that’s too steep
will
make your vehicle roll over.
You could be
seriously injuredor killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepnessof the incline, don’t drive
across it. Find another route instead.
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
Q: too
steep,but I hit some loosegravel and start to
slide downhill.What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting toslide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way toprevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface is
like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open.If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll beright in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.
I
a CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow
or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer
braking distances.
It’s best to usea low gear when you’re inmud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea isto keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink intothe sand. Thishas
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressurein your tires slightly
when driving on sand. Thiswill improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On
wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steeringand difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
4-26
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or riversbe
can
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice,or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
and
vehicle could fall through the ice and you
your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain canmean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t toodeep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able tostart your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer
to stop.
II
I A CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
If it’s
and you and your passengers could drown.
only shallow water,it can still wash away the
ground from under yourtires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debristhat has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. Thesesubstances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service dueto
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
4-27
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers arelikely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs,with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-28
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to seethe
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glareat night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glasswould,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far lessof a
roadway when you are ina turn or curve. Keepyour
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just asyour headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even aware of it.
4-29
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare
tuned for drivingon dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and trafficsignals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road andeven
people walking.
1-
”
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
4-30
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
A
CAUTION:
I
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-31
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride onthe water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little orno contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road.If you can seereflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The
best advice isto slow down when it israining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
of your vehicle.If you
lower than the underbody
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself moreclear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-32
City Driving
Here are ways to increaseyour safety in city driving:
0
Know the best way to getto where you are going.
Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown
part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light asa warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection ormay be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-33
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive alongthe entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are onthe freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or tothe prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads.But they have their own special rules.
Just beforeyou leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
4-34
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well inadvance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actuallyare.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated tothe
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip ashort
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a longtrip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service expertsin GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willingto help if you need it.
4-35
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it justplain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness,
or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, thedrone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less thana second, and you could crashand
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-36
Driving on steep hillsor mountains is different from
driving in flat orrolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index forinformation about driving
off-road.)
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
0
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine dosome of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
-
A CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down,your brakes could get
so
hot thatthey wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even nonegoing down a
hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your
engine assist your brakes ona steep
downhill slope.
/d
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous.Your brakes will have to
do all the work
of slowing down. They could get
so hot thatthey wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking even
or none going down
a hill. You could crash.Always have your engine
running and yourvehicle in gear whenyou
go downhill.
0
0
0
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gearshelp cool your engine
and transmission, and youcan climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the topof a hill, be alert.There could be
something in your lane, like
a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warnof
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-37
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a smallshovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will bedriving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or acouple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where yourtires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-38
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
0
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoiddriving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-39
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hikethrough the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-40
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
I
I A CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit or smell it,so you might not
know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snowfrom
around the base of ycur vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking yourexhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long asyou must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a
well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the vehicle,
and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps.
Let the heater run for a while.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a
higher speed to get enough heat. Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all the way to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle foruse at your destination. Be
sure touse the proper towing equipment designed for
recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions for
the towing equipment.
4-41
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel drive vehicles, should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they
should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground. Towing withall four wheels on
the ground should be avoided.
,
1
In rare caseswhen it’s unavoidable that a two-wheel
be towed with all four wheels onthe
drive vehicle is to
ground, the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation
should be marked and the propeller shaft removed
following the applicable service manual
removalhnstallation procedure.
I:
Shifting the transfer caseinto NEUTRAL (N) can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission.
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brakeis firmly set before you shift the
transfer case into NEUTRAL(N).
4-42
Dust or dirt can enter
the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Loading Your Vehicle
Use the following procedure to correctly tow your
vehicle on allfour wheels:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Securely attach the vehicle beingtowed to the
tow vehicle.
4. With the engine running, shift the transfer case to
NEUTRAL (N). See “Four-wheel Drive” in the
Index for the proper procedure to select the neutral
position for your vehicle.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
o n
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks
the steering column and reduces battery drain.
Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper
movement of the front wheels and tires
during towing.
The Certificatioflire label is found on the rear edgeof
the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is calledthe GVWR
(Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.
4-43
The Certificatiooire label also tellsyou the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need togo to aweigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
A CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or itcan change the way your vehicle
handles. These could causeyou to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
4-44
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if
there is a crash, they’llkeep going.
A CAUTION:
Things youput inside your vehicle can strike and
injure people in a suddenstop or turn, orin
a crash.
0 Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle sothat some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something insidethe
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
Towing a Trailer
A CAL HON:
If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when youpull a
trailer. For example, if the traileris too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriouslyinjured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followedall the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing atrailer with
your vehicle.
--
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in thismanual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving’’ in theIndex.
4-45
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing
a trailer
with your vehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If yours
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-46
If you do, here are some important points:
0
0
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good sourcefor this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step
bumper. You should always use a sway control if
your trailer will weigh more than the capacity
stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km)your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle orother parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow
You may want to shift the
in OVERDRIVE (0).
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
Use the following chart to determine how much your veh
can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
Above the 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) trailer rating, the
engine oil cooleris required on C/K- 1500 and
C/K-2500 models. Refer to the Trailering Guide
for oil cooler recommendations.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-47
Vehicle
Engine
C- 1500 (2WD) Utility
5.7L
K-1500 (4WD) Utility
K-1500 (4WD) Suburban
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
3-42
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
3.73
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
3.42
5,500 lbs. (2 497kg)
3.73
6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg)
3.42
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
3.73
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
3.42
5,500 lbs. (2 497kg)
3.73
6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg)
6.5L Diesel
3.42
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
5.7L
3.42
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
3.73
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
3.42
5,000lbs. (2 270 kg)
5.7L
5.7L
6.5L Diesel
4-4s
Max. Trailer Wt.
3.08
6.5L Diesel
C-1500 (2WD) Suburban
Axle Ratio
Vehicle
Engine
C-2500 (2WD) Suburban
5.7L
Axle Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
3.73
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
4.10
7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg)
3.73
6,500 lbs. (2 951kg)
4.10
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
3.73
8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg)
4.10
10,000 lbs. (4 540
kg)
5.7L
4.10
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
6.5L Diesel
3.73
6,000 lbs. (2 724kg)
4.10
7,500 lbs.(3 405 kg)
3.73
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
4.10
10,000 lbs.(4 540 kg)
6.5L Diesel
7.4L
K-2500 (4WD) Suburban
7.4L
4-49
You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or
advice, oryou can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it,and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See“Loading
Your Vehicle”in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-50
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh thetrailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step
bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the
proper size. This equipment is very important for
proper vehicle loading and good handling when
you’re driving.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to theroad
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave justenough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-51
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
I
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if
0
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the
rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you
do, itwill bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
4-52
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle,carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your
vehicle. You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessor
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towinga trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspectedfor
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
0 Keep the rear-most windows closed.
0 If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear oranother
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system onand with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use the
recirculation button or MAX because it
only recirculatesthe air inside yourvehicle.
(See “Comfort Controls” inthe Index.)
Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know yourrig. Acquaint yourself with the feelof
handling and braking withthe added weight of the
trailer. And always keepin mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electricalconnector,
lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailerhas
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This letsyou check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During yourtrip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can helpyou avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move thathand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
4-53
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning witha trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, treesor other objects.Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.
lbrn Signals When Towinga Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows onyour instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not.It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure thetrailer bulbs are
still working.
4-54
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 kmh)to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in
You may want to
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0).
shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the
overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place,release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
I
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P)with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly.You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle will be free
to roll, evenif your shift lever isin PARK (P). So,
be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear not
in NEUTRAL (N).
--
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.
4-55
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
Trailer Wiring Harness
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axlelubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to seethat all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-56
Light-Duty Wiring Harness
This harness has a 30 amp battery feed wire and no
connector, and should be wired by a qualifiedelectrical
technician. After choosing an aftermarket mating
connector pair, have the technician attach one connector
to the eight-wire trailer harness and the other connector
to the wiring harness on the trailer. Be sure that the
wiring harness on the trailer is strapped to the trailer’s
frame and leave it loose enough so that the wiring
doesn’t bend or break, but not so loose that it drags on
the ground. The technician can use the following color
code chart when connecting the wiring harness to
your trailer.
0
Yellow: Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal
Additional Heavy-DutyWiring
A eight-wire harness is stored under the rear end of your
vehicle. The five-wire light-duty harness is located at
the left hand rear inner lower quarter panel. The
additional heavy-duty wiring is located forward of the
rear bumper and is attached to the center of the rear
crossmember or the forward vertical surface of the
platform hitch (ifequipped).
Brown: Rear Lamps
Dark Green: Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal
White (Heavy Gauge): Ground
0
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
White (Light Gauge): Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
0
Blue: AuxiliaryElectric Trailer Brake Circuit
Orange: Fused Auxiliary Circuit
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
4-57
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle isstationary or anchored.
I NOTICE:
Using a power winch with the transmission
in
gear may damage the transmission.
When
operating a power winch, always leave the
transmission inNEUTRAL (N).
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block
the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling.
Step-Bumper Pad
If your vehicle has a rear stepbumper, it may be
equipped with a rear steppad at the center of
the bumper.
4-58
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer, you
must remove the center
cutout circle to install the
trailer ball. You must also
remove both outer cutouts
to attach the trailer
safety chains.
To remove the pad, lift the
edge of the pad from the
rear of the bumper and
swing it forward. Whenthe
pad releases from the
Section 5 Problems On The Road
Here you’ll find what todo about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5- 13
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engines)
5- 15
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-39
Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand,Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button at the top
of the steering column all
the way down to make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Your hazard warning flashers letyou warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the sideof the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery (or batteries) has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to
start yourvehicle. But please use the following steps to
do it safely.
I
A
/r\ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
0 They contain acid that can burnyou.
0 They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things canhurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your
vehicle warranty.
Trying to start your
vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P). If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is
not in NEUTRAL(N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well asradios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. And it could
save your radio!
5-4
NOTICE:
If you leave your radioon, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be
covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the
hood can start upeven
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and
tools awayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
A CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this,
and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough
water. You
don’t need to add water to the
ACDelco
Freedom@ battery (or batteries) installed in
every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If
you don’t, explosivegas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you.
Don’t get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
On vehicles equipped with dual batteries, make any
battery connections to the primary battery located on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
I A CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-5
7. Don't let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the
good battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery's
negative (-) cable.
Don't let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative (-) cable
doesn't go to the dead
battery. It goes toa
heavy unpainted metal
part of the vehicle with
the dead battery.
5-6
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have your GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance” in
the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new, by adding such things as fog lamps, aero
skirting, orspecial tires and wheels, these things could
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has
the four-wheel-drive option.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and transfer case, if you have one.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-8
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains these towing
instructions. The operator may want to seethem.
To help avoid injury toyou or others:
Never let passengers ride ina vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safeor posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under yourvehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chainson each
side when towinga vehicle.
A CAUTION:
Front Towing
A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. Thiscan cause a collision,
serious personalinjury and vehicle damage.The
vehicle should be tightly secured with
chains or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the
drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
5-9
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k d ) , 50 miles (80 km)
Tow Limits -- 55 rnph (88 km/h) or legal speed limit,
distance is unlimited
If your vehicle is two-wheel drive, use the
following directions:
1. Engage the parking brake.
If your vehicle is four-wheel drive, use the
following directions:
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
1. Engage the parking brake.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing service.
(Do not use thevehicle’s steering column lock
for this.)
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Place the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing service.
(Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock
for this.)
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
5. Place the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). See
“Four-wheel Drive” in the Index for the proper
procedure to select NEUTRAL (N).
6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake.
5-10
Rear Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Tow Limits -- 55 mph (88 k h ) or legal speed limit,
distance is unlimited
If your vehicle is two-wheel drive, use the
following directions:
1. Engage the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing service.
(Do not use the vehicle’s steeringcolumn lock
for this.)
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
5 . When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake.
5-11
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 km/h), 50 miles (80 km)
6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake and turn the ignition OFF to reduce
battery drain.
If your vehicle isfour-wheel drive, usethe
following directions:
1. Engage the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing service.
(Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock
for this.)
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
5. Put the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). See
“Four-wheel Drive” in the Index for the proper
procedure to select NEUTRAL (N). If the engine
will not start and your vehicle is equipped with the
automatic transfer case, you must transport the
vehicle using a car carrier.
5-12
NOTICE:
If your vehicleis equipped with four-wheel drive
and the towing limits must be exceeded,
a towing
dolly must be used under the front wheels
or
vehicle/powertrain damagewill occur.
Engine Overheating
(Gasoline Engine)
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see“Engine
Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, evenif you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you seeor hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.Wait until
there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keepdriving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with nocoolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-13
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see orhear no
steam, theproblem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the enginecan get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to besafe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle
speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning, turn offthe
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to fullhot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this fora minute or so:
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0).
5-14
Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what
you'll see:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running
and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don't do anything else until it cools down.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan(s)
The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark.
5-15
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in theradiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the coolingsystem.
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
If you
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there is aleak. If you run
the engine, it could
lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before
you drive thevehicle.
NOTICE:
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the COLD mark, add a 50150 mixture
of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See
“Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning systemis set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others couldbe burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.
1
Engine damage from running your engine
without
coolant
isn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if
the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is
If it
doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn
off the engine.
5-16
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank -- Gasoline Engines
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze
and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolantand the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above the COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool beforeyou do it.
5-17
A CAUTION:
Steam ana scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the
cooling system,including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to cool if youever have to
turn the pressure cap.
--
5-18
--
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-19
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
5-20
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
I
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s).
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
5-21
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When
the clutchis engaged, the fan spins faster
to provide
more air tocool the engine.In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases asthe clutch more fully engages.So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts.It is merely the coolingsystem functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain yourtires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
If a front tire fails,
the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stopwell out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use ina
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want thevehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, thenext part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
5-22
A CAUTION:
Changing a tire can causean injury. The vehicle
you or other
can slipoff the jack and roll over
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire.To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift leverin PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case
is in a drive
gear not in NEUTRAL(N).
4. "urn off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won't move,
you can putblocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
--
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the SpareTire and Tools
The equipment you'll need is located in the rear cargo
area. You'll also find your spare tire there.
On two-door utility and Suburban models, the spare tireis
located at the rear of the vehicle. To remove the sparetire,
first open the tire cover,if you have one. Turn the wing nut
to the left and take it, and the adapter, off the bolt. Take the
tire out of the vehicle and remove the tire cover.
On four-door utility models, the spare tiremay be stored
under the vehicle in an underbody carrier.
5-23
Lower
Raise
D
4-DOOr Utility Models
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Ratchet
D. Jack Handle
E. Retainer
E Valve Stem, Pointed Down
G. Spare Tire
5-24
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. One side of the ratchet has an UPmarking. The other
side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the ratchet to
the hook near the end of the jack handle (as
illustrated) with the DOWN marking facing you.
Insert the other end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the ratchet to lower the spare tire to the ground.
Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
If your two-door utility
model has a jack cover, turn
the wing nut to the left and
take the cover off.
To take the jack out,turn the wing nut to the left and
take it and theretainer off. Take the jack and storage box
out and take thetools out of the box.
To take the jack out, turn the wing-head bolt to the left
and take it and the retainer off. Take the jack and storage
box out and take the tools out of the box.
Your vehicle may have a pairof emergency gloves
secured tothe jack. You can use them when changing
the tire, or during other emergency situations.
Remember to replace them with the jack, so you will
have them if needed later.
Your vehicle may have a pair of emergency gloves
secured to the jack. You can use them when changing
the tire, or during other emergency situations.
Remember to replace them with the jack, so you will
have them if needed later.
To open the jack cover on four-door utility models, turn
the wing nut to the left and take the cover off.
If your Suburban has a jackcover, lift the tab up to
release the cover, then take it off.
5-25
To take the jack out, turn the wing nut to the left and
take it andthe retainer off. Take the jack and storage box
out and take the tools out of the box.
The jack handle extension is used if the flat tire is on the
rear of the vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a pair of emergency gloves
secured to the jack. You can use them when changing
the tire,or during other emergency situations.
Remember to replace them with the jack, so you will
have them if needed later.
A
1
Attach the jack handle (and jack handle extension,if
needed) to the jack.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), wheel wrench (D)
and the ratchet (E).
5-26
UP Marking
DOWN Marking
One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The other
side has a DOWN marking.
With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you,
rotate the ratchet to the right. That will lift the jack head
a little.
5-27
If your vehicle has wheel
nut caps, use the wheel
wrench and ratchet to
remove them. Turn the
wheel wrench to the left,
with DOWN facing you, to
remove the wheel nut caps.
Then take off the hub cap.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Use the ratchet and
wheel wrenchto loosen
all the wheel nuts. Turn
the wheel wrenchto the
left, with DOWN facing
you, to loosen the wheel
nuts. Don’t remove the
wheel nuts yet.
If the wheel also has a trim ring, use the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge and remove it.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece,place the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry off.
5-28
2. If the flat tireis on the rear of the vehicle, put the
jack handleextension on the jack handle.
A CAUTION:
Front
Position
Rear
Position
3. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tireis
on the front of the vehicle, position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the rear
of the vehicle, position the jack on the axle near the
flat tire between the spring and the shock absorber.
-
-
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could bebadly injured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle whenit is supported only bya jack.
I A CAUTION:
r
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoidpersonal
injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-29
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
Front Position
Rear Position
4. With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle
by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench to the right.
Raise thevehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enoughroom for the spare tire to fit.
5-30
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
I A C WTION:
I
Rust or dirton the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened,can make the wheel nuts
become looseafter a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, removeany rust or dirtfrom the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In.an
emergency, youcan use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
7. Replace the
wheel nuts with
the rounded end
of the nutstoward
the wheel.
Tighten each wheel nut by hand with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is held against the hub.
Never use oilor grease onstuds or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould
fall off, causing serious
a
accident.
5-31
9. Tighten each wheel
nut by rotating the
wheel wrench to
the right.
~
Front Position
~~
Rear Position
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel
wrench to the left. Lower the jack completely.
5-32
I.’
10. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown. Rotate the wheel wrench to the right.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque. For propertorque, see
“Capacities and Specifications” inthe Index.
5-33
Store the flat tire where the spare tire is stored.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts inthe proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
11. Put the wheel trim back on. For vehicles with plastic
wheel nut caps, tighten the caps until they are finger
tight, then tightenthem an additional one-half of a
turn with the ratchet and wheel wrench.
Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
5-34
Put the tools into thestorage box and close it tightly. Fit
the storage box on the bracket with the bolt through the
box. Put the jack ontothe box. Be sure the jack is stored
as shown in the following illustrations. The jack handle
attachment point is circled in the following illustrations
to show the direction the jack should face when it is
stored properly. Secure the emergency gloves, if your
vehicle has them, to the jack using the provided strap.
Slide the retainer over the bolt onto the jack and put the
wing nut on it. Turn the nut to the right until it is tight
against the retainer.
Replace the jack storage cover, if your vehicle has
one, by simply reversing the removal procedure
described earlier.
A
B
D
E
Jack Storage
Jacking Tool Storage
A. Wheel Wrench
A. Retainer
B. Jack Handle
B. Nut
C. Ratchet
C. Jack
D. Jacking Tool Storage Box
D. Jack Storage Box
E. Jack Handle Extension
E. Bracket
-- 2-Door Utility Model
5-35
A
B
E
C
Jack Storage
-- 4-DOOr Utility Model
Jack Storage
A. Retainer
A. Retainer
B. Nut
B. Nut
C . Jack
C. Jack Storage Box
D. Jack Storage Box
D. Bracket
E. Bracket
E. Jack
5-36
-- Suburban
Store the flat tire in the cargo area of two-door utility
and Suburban models and secure it to the tire carrier. To
store the flat tire:
3
1. Put the cover back on the tire if your vehicle has one.
2. Put the flat tire in the cargo area of the vehicle, over
the retainer bolt.
5. Slide the adapter onto the bolt in the proper location
for your model and put the wing nut on.
4. Turn the wing nut to the right until the adapter is
tight and secure against the wheel.
5. Close the tire cover, if you have one.
I
Spare Tire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Carrier
J-Bolt
Adapter
Spare Tire
Nut
Cover
-- 2-Door Utility Model
7. Pins
8. J-Bolt
9. Use Upper Hole and Pin
for P265 Tire or Lower
Hole and Pin forLT245,
P245 and P235 Tires
Be sure the J-bolt is hooked properly for your model or
tire size as shown.
5-37
Lower
-5
bf
6
c
8
--
Spare Tire 4-DOOr Utility Model
Spare Tire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I-Bolt
J-Bolt
Carrier
Spare Tire
Adapter
-- Suburban
A. Hoist Assembly
6. Nut
7. Cover
8. Use Lower Adapter
Hole for eight-Lug
Rim Only
C. Ratchet
Be sure the J-bolt is hooked properly for your model or
tire size as shown.
5-3s
B. Hoist Shaft
D. Jack Handle
E. Retainer
E Valve Stem, Pointed Down
G. Spare Tire
Raise
For four-door utility models equipped with an
underbody spare tire carrier, follow these instructions to
restore a spare or flat tire:
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
1. Lay the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle.
Position the tire so that the valve stem is pointed
down and to the rear of the vehicle.
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast.The method known as
“rocking” can helpyou get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure that the retainer is fullyseated
across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the ratchet, with the UP mark facing you,
the
near the hook at the end of the jack handle. Insert
other end, on an angle, through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until there are
two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tire hoist
cannot be over-tightened.
5 . Grasp and push against the tire to be sure it isstored
securely and does not move.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can
explode, and youor others could be injured.
And,
the transmissionor other partsof the vehiclecan
overheat. That could cause
an engine
compartment fireor other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheelsas little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-39
NOTICE:
Using the RecoveryHooks
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your
vehicle as wellas the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chainson your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear thearea around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drivevehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after afew tries, you may need
to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if
your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-40
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.The
recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
A CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used,
are under alot of
force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Never
pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks
could breakoff and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
I NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and would
it
not
be coveredby warranty.
5-41
@bNOTES
5-42
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluidand lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6- 2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6- 8
6-8
6- 14
6- 18
6-20
6-23
6-24
6-26
6-29
6-29
6-30
6-3 1
Service
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuels in Foreign Countries (Gasoline Engines)
Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
Four-wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-32
6-36
6-36
6-43
6-43
6-5 1
6-52
6-55
6-56
6-60
6-6 1
6-62
6-67
6-69
6-70
6-7 1
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Care of the Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Replacement Parts
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to dosome of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper GM Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Genuine
Parts
6-2
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof
Your Vehicle
You can be injured and your
vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about
it.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools beforeyou attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
0 Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners,parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith
your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof
your vehicle.
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine
Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability and
emission control system protection compared to
other gasolines.
6-3
Be sure theposted octane is at least
87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it candamage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane orhigher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pingingnoise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it isdesigned to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels arenot available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission controlsystem
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return
to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected.The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer forservice.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it.
It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
(Gasoline Engines)
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuelavailability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following addressfor
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and giveyour
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
6-5
Filling Your Tank (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Filling Your
Tank (Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
I
A CAUTION:
I
F
Gasoline vaporis highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the left
side of your vehicle.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below the
fuel filler neck.
6-6
To remove thecap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
If you get gasolineon yourself and then
something ignites it,you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on
you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler
cap slowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
way.
the cap all the
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle”in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. Thediagnostic system can
determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for
you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Filling a PortableFuel Container
A CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline
vapor. You can
be badly burned and your
vehicle damaged if this
you and others:
occurs. To help avoid injury to
Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
Do not fill a container while it is insidea
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bedor
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
IA
CAUTION:
If your vehic1.e has air conditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan under the
hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engineis not running.
Keep hands, clothing and
tools away from any
underhood electricfan.
Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline or
diesel fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield
washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You
or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hotengine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, first
pull the handle inside
the vehicle.
Then go tothe front of the vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hood release, located just to the passenger’s
side of the center of the grill.
Lift the hood.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, it may have an
auxiliary engine fan in addition to the belt-driven fan.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps areon
properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
6-9
“VORTEC” 5700 Engine
When you lift u p the hood you’ll see:
6-10
A.Battery
H. Fan
B. Air Cleaner
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Radiator Cap
J. Engine Oil Fill
D. Coolant Recovery Tank
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Dipstick
M. FuseRelay Center
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
6-11
“VORTEC” 7400 Engine
When you lift up the hood you’ll see:
6-12
A.Battery
H. Engine Oil Fill
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
I. Fan
C. Air Cleaner
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D. Radiator Cap
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
E Engine Oil Dipstick
M. FuseRelay Center
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
6-13
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Checking Engine Oil
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
When to Add Engine Oil
The engineoil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is
located on the passenger’s side of the engine.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level,
6-14
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operatingrange,
your engine couldbe damaged.
The engine oil fill cap on the “VORTEC” 5700 is
located on the driver’s side engine valve cover. The
engine oil fill cap on the “VORTEC” 7400 is located on
the front of the engine, near the radiator.
1
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburstsymbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasolineengines.
You should alsouse the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-15
RECOMMENDEDSAEVISCOSITYGRADEENGINE
OILS
FOR BESTFUELECONOMYANDCOLDSTARTING,SELECTTHELOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK
FOR MIS
HOT
WEATHER
I
“F
k 100
SYMBOL
n\
NOTICE:
“C
~
-
+ 21
+ 60.
-
+ 16
+40-
-
+4
+ 20 -
-
-7
0.
Use only engine oil
with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
- +38
+80-
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
-18
I
If you are in an area where thetemperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C),consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oilor an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier coldstarting and better protection for your engine
at extremelylow temperatures.
SAE 5W-30
PREFERRED
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-16
As shown in the chart,SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
to be 0°F (- 18 C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short tripkity
maintenance schedule:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oilto
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure todrain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle itby taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-17
Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines)
The air cleaner assembly
has an indicator that lets
you know when the air
filter is dirty and needs to
be serviced.
The indicator is located in the air intake tube between
the air cleaner and the engine. See “Owner Checks and
Services’’in the Index to determine when to check
the indicator.
Your air cleaner is located between the battery and
coolant recovery tank.
6-18
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
green, no air filter service is required. When the area
inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR
FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced.
To remove the airfilter, unhook the retainer clips and
remove the cover.Lift the filter and the connected duct
out of the air cleaner housing. Hold the duct and remove
the filter by both pulling andtwisting the filter away
from the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop
on the duct.
Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the
filter housing.
After the air filter is properly serviced, the indicator
should be reset. Push the button on top of the indicator
to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone.
Install the duct and the filter into the air cleaner housing.
Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing.
Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips.
6-19
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services”
in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Automatic
Transmission Fluid” in the Diesel Supplement.
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfkes, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with
the air cleaner off.
NOTICE:
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90 O F (32 C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0 When doing frequent trailer towing.
0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every100,OOOmiles
(166 OOO km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in theIndex.
1
O
If the air cleaner is off,a backfire can cause a
How to Check
damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
into your engine, which willdamage it. Always
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
have the aircleaner in place when you’re driving.
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
6-20
Checking Transmission Fluid Hot
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F ( lO"C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
A cold checkis made after the vehicle has been sitting
for
eight hoursor more with the engineoff and is used only as
a reference. Let the engine run at idle
for five minutes if
outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it's
colder than 50"F (10"C), you may haveto idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low duringcold
a check,
you must perform a hotcheck before adding fluid.This
will give you a more accurate readmg the
of fluid level.
0
While pulling a trailer.
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
To get the right reading,the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93 " C). See "Checking Transmission
Fluid Hot" in the Index.
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
6-21
0
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
1. The red transmission dipstick is located at the rear of
the enginecompartment, on the passenger’s side.
Flip the handle up and then pull out thedipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.
6-22
How to Add Fluid
Rear Axle
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids andLubricants” in the Index.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove~iZZ.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111, becausefluid with that labelis
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage causedby fluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your newvehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flipthe handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6-23
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluidsand
Lubricants” in the Index.
Four-wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section alsoapply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how
often to checkthe lubricant. See “PeriodicMaintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-24
Manual Transfer Case
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
Automatic Transfer Case
If the leve .s below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
6-25
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What toUse
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant touse. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” inthe Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL dl engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explainsyour cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
6-26
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
0
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning gages work as they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, is
it important thatyou use
only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL
is added to the
system, prematureengine, heater core or
radiator corrosionmay result. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months,
by the use
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL’ coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t needto add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL’ coolant.
I
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered
by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-27
Checking Coolant
I
A CAUTIOP'
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can
allow steam and
scalding liquidsto blow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are
hot.
--
--
.. . .
The coolant recovery tank is locatedon the passenger's
side at the rear corner of the engine compartment.
When your engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at
the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark, or a
little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-28
4dd coolant mixtureat therecovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
'ION:
You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolanton a hotengine.
Radiator Pressure Cap
m--
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolantloss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on
the radiator filler neck.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat
is recommended.
6-29
Power SteeringFluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe thecap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew thecap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the
Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
6-30
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer flu.id, be sure toread
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehiclein an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
NOTICE:
0
0
Adding Washer Fluid
0
0
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
to freeze
fluid. Water can cause the solution
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system.Also,
water doesn’t clean aswell as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tankonly
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansionif freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank
if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is here. It isfilled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
I
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid levelin the
reservoir might go down.The fust is that the brake fluid
goes down toan acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reasonis that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake
system fured, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
6-32
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can on
spill
the engine.The fluid will burn if the engine
is
hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
@
-
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
I
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
1.\
CAUTIO
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may
not work well, or they
may not even workat all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
1
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark or the top of the window on the side of
the reservoir.
6-33
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
a few
brake system parts. For example, just
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system partsso badly that they’ll have tobe
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash itoff
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front discbrakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
A CAU J O N :
r
The brake wear warning sound means soon
that
your brakeswon’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
1
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads
could result incostly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section7
of this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapidincrease in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up andfirmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is tohave really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake liningswear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakescan change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change inmany
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Fluid Leak Check
After the vehicle has been parked for awhile, inspect the
surface under the vehicle for water, oil, fuel or other
fluids. Water dripping from the air conditioning system
after it has been used is normal. If you notice fuel leaks
or fumes,the causes should be found and corrected
at once.
6-35
Battery
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@ battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
.
ON:
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas
if you
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting’’ in the Index
a battery without
for tips on working around
getting hurt.
6-36
Contact your dealer to learn how toprepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all thelamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. For the proper bulb
type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
Halagen Bulbs
I A CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and
can burstif you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or
others could be injured.Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Sealed Beam Headlamps
1. Remove the four
screws from the,
headlamp retainer.
4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it in place.
2. Pull the headlamp out and remove the retainer.
5. Install the retainer to the headlamp and tighten
the screws.
6-37
Composite Headlamps
3. Unplugthe
4. Turn the bulb to the left and remove it.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it to
the right until it is tight.
1. Remove the two hex head pins at the top of the
radiator support, as shown.
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
6-38
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the two hex head pins.
Front Parkinflrn Signal Lamps with
Sealed Beam Headlamps
1. Remove the two screws
at the inside edge of the
parking/turn signal
lamp assembly.
4. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly.
5 . Push in gently on the bulb, turn it to the left and
remove it from the socket.
2. Remove the lamp assembly by swinging it out from
the inside edge and sliding it out at the outside edge.
6. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently press in on
the bulb and turn it tothe right until it is tight.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it to the right until it locks.
8. Put the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the screws.
6-39
Front Parkin-rn Signal
Composite Headlamps
I
.
Lamps with
3. Pull the socket out of the
lamp assembly.
1. Remove the four screws
and take out the
parkingltum signal
lamp assembly.
4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it to the left and
remove it from the socket.
2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while
turning the socket to the left.
5. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently press in on
the bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight.
6. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it to the right until it locks.
7. Put the parkinglturn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the four screws.
6-40
Sidemarker Lamps with Sealed Beam and
Composite Headlamps
3. Pull the bulb straight out
of the socket.
1. Remove the four screws
and pull out the
parkinghrn signal
lamp assembly.
4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it
is tight.
2. Reach through the opening and turn the sidemarker
bulb socket to the left and remove it.
5. Put the socket back into the sidemarker assembly
and turn it to the right to tighten it.
6. Replace the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly and
tighten the screws.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
The individual bulbs in the CHMSL are not replaceable.
See your dealer for assistance.
6-41
Roof Marker Lamps
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lens.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Remove the screws from
the bulb retainer and
take the bulb retaineroff
of the lamp assembly.
3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it
is tight.
4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.
Rear Lamps
1 . Open the tailgate or rear doors.
2. Remove the two black plastic plugs from the rear
lamp assembly access holes.
3. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
inside the fenderand
pull out the lamp
assembly. You may want
to use a magnetic
screwdriver when
removing the screws.
6-42
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Put in a new bulb and push it straight in until it
is tight.
7. Replace the bulbretainer.
8. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws. You may want to use a magnetic screwdriver
when installing the screws.
9. Close the tailgate or rear doors.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
For proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your GM Warrantybooklet fordetails.
6-43
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could havean air-out anda serious
accident. See“Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires.The resulting accident
could causeserious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden impact
such as when you hit a pothole. Keeptires
at the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
6-44
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document
in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile ( 1.6 km).
You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation
pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads.
On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures
for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved
Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door.
Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see
the label for theminimum cold inflation pressures for
that load.
When to Check
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires havetoo much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
0 Bad handling
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Tire Inspectionand Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information.
6-45
The purpose of regular rotation is toachieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
FRT
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
6-46
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificationire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt onwheel,
a
or on the parts which
to
it is fastened, can make
wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places wherewheel
the
attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can
be
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but
later, if you
sure touse a scraper or wire brush
off. (See
need to, to getall the rust or dirt
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
I
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
0
0
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damagethat
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certificationmire label.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get oneswith that same TPC Specnumber. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to giveproper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followedby an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-47
I .ACAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle maynot
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may alsocause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel
rim flanges could develop
cracks after many
miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
I
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12inches (25 to 30 cm),
or tosome limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in drivinghabits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-0
A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat andits ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established fora tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to bereset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-49
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
’h,
CAWAON:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
o r wheel nuts on yourvehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling
of your
vehicle, make your tires
lose air and make
you
lose control. You could havea collision in which
you or others could be injured.Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
6-50
NOTICE:
The wrongwheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to thebody and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a usedwheel on yourvehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
If you have to replace a
and cause an accident.
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16 or LT26975R16
size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage
your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another typeof traction deviceonly if its
manufacturer recommends it for
use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting yourvehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
If you do find traction devices that
will fit, install
them on therear tires.
If you have a tiresize other thanP265/75R16 or
LT26Y75R16, use tire chains only where
legal
and only when you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
tires of the rearaxle.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
Don’t use chains on the tires
of the frontaxle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them.If the contact continues,
slow down until itstops. Driving too fastor
spinning thewheels with chains on will
damage yourvehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a containerto clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
6-51
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Turpentine
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaningfabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials’’ in the Index.)
0
Lacquer Thinner
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Nail Polish Remover
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
0
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
6-52
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often.A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don't
saturate the material and don't rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that hasbeen
treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it lookingnew.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by catsup, coffee(black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2, If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. When dry, if needed, clean lightly with dry
spot remover.
6-53
Stains caused by candy, ice cream,mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
6-54
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soapand wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
e For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
uo not bleacn or dye safety belts. If you
do, it
may severely weakenthem. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches.Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners areused on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached acrossthe
defogger grid.
6-55
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
If the windshield is not clear after using
the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Washing Your Vehicle
Clean theoutside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaningpowder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish orcar washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Grime from the windshield will stickto the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade
by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check thewiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last
longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply
silicone greasewith a clean clothat least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids andLubricants” in the Index.)
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
High pressure car washes may cause water toenter
your vehicle.
Finish Care
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap toclean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made fora basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
I NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
6-57
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that isusually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special carewith aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or causticsoap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for allbright metal parts.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner.
I NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipeoff any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaceson the body or wheelsof the
vehicle. Petroleum-based productsmay damage
the paint finish.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surfaceof these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
6-58
~~~
~~~
~
~
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants
can fall upon and
attack painted surfaceson your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations,and
small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody. Ifthese are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-59
Appearance Care Materials Chart
I
I
USAGE
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated 23
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper arid brass
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Glass Cleaner
Cleans and lightly waxes
Wash Wax Concentrate
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
1052918””
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Armor All Protectant
vinyl and rubber
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
Multi-Purpose Interior Clean1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
floor
and
er
Spray on and rinse with water
Wheel Cleaner
16 oz. (0.473 L)
1052929
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Cleans and shines a variety of surface types
12345002
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Armor All” Cleaner
Shines vehicle without scratching
1 234572 1
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
Spray on tire shine
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
12377964
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Removes light scratches and oxidation
and protects finish
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377966
12377984
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
Removes contaminants, blemishes
and
swirl
marks
** Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052870
I
I
I
SIZE
in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
I
I
I
TM
I
I
I
TM
I
I
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
.
1
-
111.111.1111
111 111111 1 1 1 111111..
1111111.1111
111..1111
11-
LE4UXWM072675
E N G I N E A 6 9 87
PLANT
MODEL
CODE
YEAR
\ ASSEMBLY
This is thelegal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
your VIN,
0
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-61
Electrical System
Headlamps
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flickeron and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
I NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical
to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motorcools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical
overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause
wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the the windshield before using the windshield
wipers. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and OtherPower Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes.
This protects the circuit until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
6-62
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This
greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index
for more information.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it assoon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is onthe driver’s side edge
of the instrument panel. Pull
off the cover to accessthe
fuse block.
You can remove fuses with
a fuseextractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the
fuse block access door.
To remove fuses, if you don’t have a fuseextractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
You may have spare fusesattached to the inside of
the fuse block access door. These can be used to
replace a bad fuse. However, make sure that it is the
correct amperage.
6-63
0 1
0 3
0 4
0 7
0 9
[I
10
I
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
1
Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer, CHMSL,
Hazard Lamps, Stoplamps
2
Transfer Case
3
Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp, Glove
Box Lamp, DomeReading Lamps,
Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors
6-64
FuseKircuit
Usage
Breaker
4
Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay, Lamp
Switch, Keyless Entry, LowCoolant
Module, Illuminated Entry Module,
DRAC (Diesel Engine)
Rear Comfort Controls
Cruise Control
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Crank
License Lamp, Parking Lamps,
Taillamps, Roof Marker Lamps,
Tailgate Lamps, Front Sidemarkers,
Fog Lamp Relay,Door Switch
Illumination, Fender Lamps,
Headlamp Switch Illumination
10
Air Bag System
11
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
12
A/C, A/C Blower, High Blower Relay
13
Power Amp, Rear Liftglass, Cigarette
Lighter, Door Lock Relay, Power
Lumbar Seat
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
14
4WD Indicator, Cluster, Front and
Rear Comfort Controls, Instrument
Switches, Radio Illumination,
Chime Module
15
DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay
16
Front and Rear Turn Signals, Back-up
Lamps, BTSI Solenoid
17
Radio (Ignition)
4WAL/VCM, ABS, Cruise Control
18
Radio (Battery)
19
20
PRNDL, Automatic Transmission,
Speedometer, Check Gages,
Warning Lights
21
SecurityEteering
22
Not Used
23
Rear Wiper, Rear Washer Pump
24
Front Axle, 4WD Indicator Lamp, TP2
Relay (Gasoline Engine)
A
Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power
Seat, Keyless Entry Module
B
Power Windows
Underhood FuseLRelay Center
The underhood fusehelay center is located in the rear
of the engine compartment near the brake fluid
reservoir. Move the retainer clips for the cover to
access the fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block.To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
6-65
I
STARTER
I
I
,
RELAY
L
Name
AUX FAN
ECM- 1
HTD ST-FR
AIC
HTD MIR
ENG- 1
RELAY
HTD ST-RR
LIGHTING
RELAY
Name
ECM-B
RR DEFOG
IGN-E
FUEL SOL
GLOW PLUG
HORN
6-66
Circuits Protected
Fuel Pump, PCMNCM
Rear Window Defogger
Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil,
A/C Compressor Relay, Hot
Fuel Module
Fuel Solenoid (Diesel Engine)
Glow plugs (Diesel Engine)
Horn, Underhood Lamps
BATT
IGN-A
IGN-B
ABS
BLOWER
Circuits Protected
Auxiliary Fan
Injectors, PCMNCM
Heated Front Seats
Air Conditioning
Heated Outside Mirrors
Ignition Switch, EGR, Canister
Purge, EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid,
Heated 0 2 , Fuel Heater
(Diesel Engine), Water Sensor
(Diesel Engine)
Not Used
Headlamp and Panel Dimmer
Switch, Fog and Courtesy Fuses
Battery, Fuse Block Busbar
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Hi Blower and Rear Blower
Relays
STOP/HAZ
Stoplamps
HEATED SEATS Heated Seats
Replacement Bulbs
LAMP OR BULB
HEADLAMPS
2 Headlamp System (Sealed Beam)
LowMigh Beam
4 Headlamp System (Composite)
Low Beam
High Beam
TRADE NO.
POWER RATING AT 12.8V, WATTS
H6054
35/65
2
9006
9005
55
65
2
2
LAMP OR BULB
EXTERIOR
Front Marker Lamp
Front Parking and TurnLamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Roof Marker Lamp*
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
TRADE NO.
194
2357NA
3057
3057
3156
194
194
93
2
4
2
2
2
5
2
1
*Suburban Only
6-67
LAMP OR BULB
TRADE NO.
INTERIOR
Dome Lamps
211-2
2
Reading Lamps
211-2
4
Roof Console Lamps*
168
2
Door Courtesy Lamp
194
214*
Four-Wheel-Drive Indicator**
194
1
Four-Wheel-Drive Shift Lever**
194
1
Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
194
Ashtray Lamp
194
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
74
*Suburban Only
**Manual Transfer Case
6-68
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
Engine Identification-- Gasoline Engines
Engine
Type
RPO Code
VIN Code
Fuel System
“VORTEC” 5700
V8
L3 1
R
SFI*
“VORTEC” 7400
V8
L29
J
SFI*
*Sequential Fuel Injection
Wheels and Tires
MODEL
c 1500
K 1500, C-K 2500
C-K 2500
Tire Pressure
DESCRIPTION
5 bolts (14 mm)
6 bolts (14 mm)
8 bolts (14 mm)
See the CertificatiodTire label on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or
the incomplete vehicle
document in the cab.
TORQUE
140 lb-ft (190 N-m)
140 lb-ft (190 N-m)
140 lb-ft (190 N-m)
6-69
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts-- Gasoline Engines
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer.
Engine
VIN
Oil
Air Cleaner Filter
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Gap
Fuel Filter
Wiper Blades (Front)
Wiper Blade Type (Front)
Wiper Blade Length (Front)
Wiper Blade (Rear)
Wiper Blade Type (Rear)
Wiper Blade Length (Rear)
“VORTEC” 5700
R
AC Type PF1218T
AC Type A1300CTT
Type
AC
41-932
in.
0.060 mm)
(1.52
Type
AC
GF626
GM Part No. 22154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
GM Part No. 22154396
Trico
14 inches
(35.5 cm)
“four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles -- use a PF52 oil filter.
??A1 30 1C high-capacity air cleanerfilter.
6-70
“VORTEC” 7400
J
AC Type PF1218
AC Type A1 300CTs
AC Type 41-932
0.060 in. (1.52 mm)
AC Type GF626
GM Part No. 22154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
GM Part No. 22154396
Trico
14 inches (35.5 cm)
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
VIN
QTY
Without
Rear
Heater
R
J
17.5 Quarts (16.5 L)
25 Quarts (23.5 L)
QTY With Rear Heater
20 Quarts (19 L)
27.5 Quarts (26 L)
Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level mustbe rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
ENGINE
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
VIN
R
J
QUANTITY WITH FILTER?
5 Quarts (4.8 L)
6.6 Quarts (6.3 L)
?Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
TYPE
Utility
Suburban - Gasoline
Suburban - Diesel
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
QUANTITY
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
Gallons30
( 1 13 L)
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
44 Gallons
(167
L)
If you’re not sure, askyour dealer.
42 Gallons
(159
L)
See refrigerant charge label under the hood for
charge capacity information and requirements.
6-71
b
6-72
NOTES
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain itssafety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
Long Tripmighway Definition
Long Tripmighway Intervals
7-8
7-27
7-38
7-42
7-44
7-47
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
IMPORTANT.
I
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
HI
protection
Plan
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your newvehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your GM
dealer for details.
7-2
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
Performing maintenance work on vehicle
a
can
jobs, you can
be dangerous. In trying to do some
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
job.
and the propertools and equipment for the
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications”
in the Index.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some recommended products to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure towrite it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distancesall the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checksand replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, seeyour GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
0 carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationrnire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
0 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0 are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle’’ in the Index.
0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel’’ in theIndex.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Gasoline engine vehicles and diesel engine vehicles
have different maintenance requirements. If you have a
diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel
engine vehicles only.
See the Diesel Engine Supplement for diesel engine
maintenance schedules.
Maintenance Schedule
I ShortTrip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines I
Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
--
Short TripKity Intervals Gasoline Engines
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or3 months, whichever occurs FKst).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWRabove
8,500 lbs. only). Front Wheel Bearing Repack
(2WD
only) (or at each brake relining, whichever
occurs first).
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km):
Fuel Filter Replacement.
0
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule
if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil tobreak
down sooneK
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Intervals -- GasolineEngines I
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance scheduleon
the following pages.
7-6
1 Lone: TridHie:hwav Definition -- Gasoline E n k e s 1
Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highwayconditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
Maintenance Schedule
ILong Tripmighway Intervals-- Gasoline Engines ILong TripHighway
3
-m
__
~~
~~
~
~~~
Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only).
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions). Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack
(2WD only) (or at eachbrake relining, whichever
occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow thecomplete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
.-
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km)should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000miles (240 000 km).
propshaft spline and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and
kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their
temperature is 10°F (- 12°C) or higher, or they
could bedamaged.
See “Owner Checks and Services’’ and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part Cof this schedule.
Footnotes
* * Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
-f- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
0
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage,transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides,front axle
7-8
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid asneeded at every oil change. If driving in
dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
More frequent lubrication may be requiredfor
heavy-duty or off-road use.
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
1
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
1
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
I
I
I
I
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICEDBY
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
9,000 Miles (15 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
I DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection-andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
7-10
I
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
CI For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the
front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
4
7-11
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline EnginesI
21,000 Miles (35 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfrontaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity jointsand axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfrontaxle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
7-12
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I7 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote**.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or ateach brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace asrequired.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
33,000 Miles (55000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
1
DATE
(Continued) I
SERVICED BY:
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I
7-13
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
33,000 Miles (55 000 km) (Continued)
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
cl Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed.Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
7-14
DATE
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
DATE
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
7-15
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity jointsand axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
JZuid andfilter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
7-16
DATE
I
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check redfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
(Continued)
7-17
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
57,000 Miles (95 000 km) (Continued)
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
[7 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed.Check constant
velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. (See footnote**.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote**.)
For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspectshields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace asrequired.
This is a Noise EmissionControl Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
Inspect engineaccessory drive belt. An Emission ControlService.
7-18
I DATE
I
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in
the service manual. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge
valve works properly (if equipped). Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.)
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (Seefootnote +.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
DATE
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
7-19
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
DATE
I
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
MILEAGE
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-20
MILEAGE
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule=- Gasoline Engines
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
17
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles
sold in the United States.
DATE
MILEAGE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Cl Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I DATE
I
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
17 Change
engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote**.)
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-22
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
1
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I DATE
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
MACTUAL
T T . E A C,E:
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
I SERVICED BY:
3
DATE
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
(Continued)
7-23
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only ‘tovehicles
sold in the United States.
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
7-24
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid asneeded. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
DATE
I
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
r
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY
I
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY
I
7-25
I
7
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditionslisted
previously and, therefore,haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since lastservice,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-26
DATE
I
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000km)should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at theindicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
-- Gasoline Engines
I
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, front axle
propshaft spline and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and
kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their
temperature is 10OF (- 1 2 O C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during
tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change.At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
7-27
I
~~~
Long Trip/HighwayMaintena
~~
:e Sch mule -- Gasoline Engines
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 12months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required.
This isa Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-28
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check redfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or ateach brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
(Continued)
7-29
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engine3
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replaceas required.
This isa Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
DATE
Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
7-30
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I LongTrip/HighwayMaintenanceSchedule
-- Gasoline Engines
I
0 Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Sewice. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
DATE
I
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32”C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions,change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 knz).
-
7-31
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfrontaxle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I DATE
MILEAGE
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission ControlService.
MILEAGE
1
I
1 LongTripmighwayMaintenanceSchedule
-- Gasoline Engines
1
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks.Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replaceas required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in
the service manual. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge
valve works properly, ifequipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I DATE
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
I
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
7-33
Long Tripmighway Maintenanct: Schedule-- Gasoline Engine$
67,500Miles (112 500 km) (Continued)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace asrequired.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-34
DATE
1
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel
bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Sewice. (See footnote?.)
SERVICED B Y
MILEAGE
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICEDBY
I
(Continued)
7-35
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is aNoise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
7-36
DATE
MILEAGE
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
rDATE
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-37
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the properfluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
It is importantfor you or a service station attendant to
per$orm these underhood checks at each
fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check theengine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
7-38
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have themrepaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does notneed regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator on the engine that lets you
know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be
changed. Check indicator at least twice a year or when
your oil is changed. See “Air Cleaner” in the Index for
more information. Inspect your air cleaner filter
restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is used in
dusty areas or under off road conditions.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock CylindersService
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all fuel door, body hood and body door
hinges, rear compartment hinges, tailgate handle pivot
points, latches, locks and folding seat hardware. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-39
Starter Switch Check
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
I A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, youor others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine ineach gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
7-40
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engineoff, turn the key to the RUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with
normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of
PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P)Mechanism Check
I
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicleis
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
When yo^ ,re doing this check, yourveh,,,e
could beginto move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room
in front of your vehicle incase
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.
7-41
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service
department or otherqualified service center do these
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect thefront and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust’’ in
the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
7-42
Drive Axle Service
Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditions result in frequentbraking.
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive)
Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle andtransfer case and add lubricant when necessary.
On manual shift transfer case, oil the control lever pivot
point and all exposed control linkage. Check vent hose
at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More
frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use.
7-43
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil
(Gasoline
Engine)
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
7-44
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@
or Havoline@DEX-COOL@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
.
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
@
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
’
~
DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube (GMPart
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel Bearing Lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1051344 or equivalent).
Differential,
Front and Rear
Axle
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or SAE SOW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
One-Piece
Propshaft Spline
(With
Two-Wheel
Drive)
Spline Lubricant, Special
Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345879) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 998530.
Transfer Case
DEXRON@-I11Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. 12346293 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC-LB.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
7-45
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seat and
Fuel Door Hinge
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 'or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-46
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
I
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-47
Maintenance Record
7-48
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how tocontact Chevrolet if you need assistance. Thissection also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to reportany safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
8- 10
8-10
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 11
8- 11
8- 11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects tothe United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects tothe
Canadian Government
Reporting SafetyDefects toGeneral Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
~
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
I
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1315
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4 112.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give
the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
0
0
0
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to callus so we can giveyour inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why wesuggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
I
n
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access toa
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Cure and Courtesy" Care:
Toll-free number, 1 -800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited toannounce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As theowner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-5
ROADSIDE Courtesy" Care PROVIDES:
0
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
0
0
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on theroad or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
0
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first.All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retailpurchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
0
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any Overnight warranty repair up tofive days, OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental forany
overnight warranty repair up to five days,OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.)in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation is not part of the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some state insuranceregulations make it impracticalto
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $3O/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. TheRoadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
0
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,
if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section isvery successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge tocustomers who currently own or leasea
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduledwhere eligible customers may present their
case to animpartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept orreject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some statelaws may require you to use this program
before filinga claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in thecourts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0 123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited, You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write:
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature areavailable for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
8-11
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle can be purchased
by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book
and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals havethe diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly
for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions,transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual
and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins givetechnical service information needed
to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manualonly.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
a
ORDER TOLL FREE
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adeuate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356
1-800-782-4356. Materialcannot be returnedfor credit
without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders
Only
1-313-865-5927
against the original order.
PRICE
MODEL VEHICLE
PUBLICATION FORM
TOTAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY*
NUMBER
NAME
YEAR
PRtCE
EACH*
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders
Only)
1
9.
9,
8
Manual
Repair
Service
Car & Light Truck
Transmission
Unit
Portfolio
In
Manual
Owner’s
$1
Portfolio
WithoutManual
Owner’s
1998
$90.00
1998
$40.00
1998
5.00
1998 $1
0.00
G
S
H
I
P
T
0
NOTE: Dealers and Companies pleaseprovide dealer or company
name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention
the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order formto:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outsideU S A . please writeto the above addressfor quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
DAYTIME
TELEPHONE
NO.
0
AREA CODE
GM-CHE-ORD98
*(Prices aresubject to changewithoutnotice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.)
CUSTOMER StGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $1150 plus the
U S . order processing.
b
8-14
NOTES
Section 9 Index
A i r Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
1-38
1-35
1-33
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
ReadinessLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33. 2-72
1-37
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-35
6-18. 6-70
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check . . . . . . . . 7-39
3.3,3-4. 3-6
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 1
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
6-58
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 7-44
Anti-Lock
. . . . . . . 2-75. 4.7
BrakeSystemWarning Light . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Anti.Theft, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
6-60
Appearance Care and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-57
Armrest Storage Compartment ....................
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
3-27
Audio Equipment, Adding ........................
3-10
Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20, 7-44
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
2-18
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-41
2-16
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
Axle
6-25, 7-45
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
6-23, 7-45
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
5-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement, Keyless Entry .....................
2-7
5-3, 5-5
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBAuto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
9-1
Brake
6-35
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.32.7.44
Fluid ..................................
6-32
Master Cylinder ..............................
2-24
Parking .....................................
6-35
PedalTravel .................................
6-35
Replacing System Parts ........................
2-74
System Warning Light .........................
4-52
Trailer ......................................
Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
6-34
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Brakes. Anti-Lock ...............................
4-6
Braking ........................................
Braking in Emergencies ...........................
4-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Break.In.NewVehicle
2-42
Brightness Control ..............................
BTSICheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
6.36.6.67
Bulb Replacement .........................
2-50
C a m p e r Type Mirrors ..........................
Canadian Roadside Assistance ......................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications ......................
6-69
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2.29.4.41.4.51. 4.52
2-59
CargoSecurityShade ............................
2-60
Cargo Tie Downs ...............................
7-38
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
3.12.3.14
Cassette Tape Player .......................
3-28
Care .......................................
3.14.3.18
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-41
1-38
Center Passenger Position ........................
4-43
Certificationrnire Label ..........................
9-2
Chains.Safety .................................
4-51
6-51
Chains. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
Changing a Flat Tire .............................
Charging System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-81
Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Transmission Fluid Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
6-59
Chemical Paint Spotting ..........................
1-49
ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
1-54
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-53
WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
6-63
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-18, 6-70
Cleaner, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6-57
Exterior LampsLenses ........................
6-53
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
6-54
Instrument Panel .............................
6-55
Interior Plastic Components .....................
6-54
Leather .....................................
6-56
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-53
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Climate Control. Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-2
Climate Control. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comfort Guides. Rear Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
3-29
CompactDiscCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 19. 3-23
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Compact Disc Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21. 3-23
2-44. 2-47
Compass.Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass. Rearview Mirror with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44. 2-47
6-38
Composite Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55. 2-57
4-5
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26. 7-44
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 15
Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
CoolingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 15
8-8
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55.2-56. 2-57
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users. . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6-58
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
5-3
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects. Reporting Safety ........................
8-10
4-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Defogger.RearWindow ..........................
3-8
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
3-17
Dolby@B Noise Reduction .......................
DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Door
Child Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-58
Storagepocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-40
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
4-9
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-32
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
4-52
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
E a s y Entry Seat (2-Door utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2-32
Electric Tailgate Glass Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14. 3.27. 6-62
6-62
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
with Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
with CompasslTemperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-52. 3-9
Electronic Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44.2.47
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.6.12
6.26.7.44
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 15
Coolant Levelcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
2-29
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 1
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
5-13
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
6-69
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StartingYour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 14. 6.7 1. 7.44
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.14
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.14
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-79
6-17
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry to the Rear Seat (Suburban Second Seat) . . . . . . . . 1.13
6-5
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-18, 6-70
Filter, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17, 6-70
Filter, Engine Oil ..........................
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6-59
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Gear, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
6-71
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
7-44
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding the Rear Seat (2-Door Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Folding the Rear Seat (4-DOOr Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Folding the Second Seat (Suburban) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Foreign Countries, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
2- 19, 6-24
Four-wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
FrenchLanguageManual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25, 7-45
Front Axle Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Front ParMTurn Signal Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 6-39, 6-40
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
5-9
FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling a Portable Container ...................... 6-8
6-6
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-82
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
InForeign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2-79
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2-71
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
2-74
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-53
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-43
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Positions, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16
2-52
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-43
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43..
Guide Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-43
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
BulbReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.37.6.38. 6.67
2-34
High/LowBeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
1-4
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4, 3-7
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
4-36
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 1
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H o .~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
6-9
2-32
4-32
2-12
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
2-42
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44. 2-47
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-42
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
Drive Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
7-42
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-42
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-42
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7-42
Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
2-68
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
2-70
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
5.24.5.25
Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
K e y Lock Cylinder Service ......................
Keyless EntrySystem ............................
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-39
2-6
2-2
Labels
Certificatioflire .............................
4-43
6-61
Service Parts Identification .....................
4-43
Tire-Loading Information ......................
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
2-40
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
2-40
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Interior .....................................
2-41
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-27
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Lights
. . 1-33, 2-72
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75, 4-7
Brake System Warning .........................
2-74
Charging Warning System ......................
2-73
2-81
Check Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Headlamp High-Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 1
Safety Belt Reminder .....................
1- 18, 2-72
2-80
Security ....................................
Service Engine Soon ..........................
2-76
2-80
Service Four-wheel Drive ......................
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
9-6
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
4-43
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
ChildSecurity ................................
2-5
7-39
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door ........................................
2-3
7-41
Ignition Transmission Check ....................
7-39
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-32
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-44
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-39
Lubrication Service, Body ........................
Luggagecarrier ................................
2-61
Maintenance. Normal Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Maintenance Record ............................
7-47
Maintenance Schedule ............................
7-1
Long TripEiighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-7
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
7-38
Owner Checks and Services .....................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-5
Short TripKity Definition .......................
Short TripKity Intervals ........................
7-5
6-59
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
2-76
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
1-2
ManualFrontSeat ...............................
2-49
ManualMirror .................................
2-30
Manualwindows ...............................
Methanol ...................................... 6-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
2-50
CamperType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
ConvexOutside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview with Compass . . 2-44
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview with
CompasslTemperatureDisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Electrochromic Outside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52. 3-9
2.44.2.47
Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
vi
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 12
4-29
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
2-7 1
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
4- 14
Off-RoadDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 11
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 14.6-71. 7-44
Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opener. GarageDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-53
Overdrive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
5- 13
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8- 12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-59
Park
2-16
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
2-11
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-41
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
1-31
PassengerPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing
.....................................
4-11
2-1 1, 2-80
Passlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Power
Auxiliary Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
2-4
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptionFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
1-3
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30, 7-44
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-58
Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts ....................
5-1
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1, 8- 12
9-7
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5- 19
6-29
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.3-12.3-14. 3.19
Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
Rear
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23. 7-45
Child Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
6-42
Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-40
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 1-44
Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-40
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Windshield Wiper and Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
RearTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44. 2-47
Electrochromic Daymight with Compass . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Electrochromic Daymight with
Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-44. 2-47
Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecoveryHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-16
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 1
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
Removing the Rear (Third) Seat (Suburban) . . . . . . . . . . 1- 15
Replacement
6-67. 6-68
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Wheel. Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
9-8
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-64
Replacing the Rear (Third) Seat (Suburban) . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
8-10
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraints
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-64
1-49
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Systemcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Reverse. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Right Front Passenger Position . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-7
Roadside Assistance. Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-40
Roof Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-38
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-46
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-63
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
Incorrect Usage ....................
1-25, 1-61. 1-62
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-39
1.22.1.40
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-60
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Questions andAnswers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
1-44
Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1-40
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.18. 2.72
Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-64
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24. 1-42
1-46
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
4-51
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 10
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Sealed Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
Seatback
1-6
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats
1-7
Easy Entry (2-Door Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry to the Rear (Suburban Second Seat) . . . . . . . . . . 1- 13
Folding the Rear (2-Door Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Folding the Rear (+Door Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 10
Folding the Second (Suburban) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 1
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-3
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Rear (Third) Seat (Suburban) . . . . . . . . 1- 15
Replacing the Rear (Third) Seat (Suburban) . . . . . . . . 1- 16
. . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-58
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54.1.56.
Second Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Security
. Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Security Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
6-2
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 11. 8-12
EngineSoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 11. 8-12
6-61
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 11. 8- 12
Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 1. 8-12
Service Four-wheel Drive Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
8- 11 8-12
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
6-58
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Out of Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24. 1-42
SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
4-13
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
6-69
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-69
Specifications. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
4-9
Speed Sensitive Steering ..........................
2-71
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
7-40
Starter Switch Check ............................
2- 13
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
4- 9
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Emergencies ...............................
4- 10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 9
4-9
Speedsensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 9
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step-BumperPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-58
2-52
Storage Compartments ...........................
2-52
Storage, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
2-64
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-54
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 1
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Glass Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
3-28
TapePlayerCare ...............................
2-10
Theft .........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature. CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-24
THEFTLOCKTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
Third Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Time. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Tirechains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
4-43
Tire Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
6-49
Alignment and Balance ........................
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
6-51
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6-44
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
Inspection and Rotation ........................
4-43
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Traction ....................................
6-49
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-48
6-50
Used Wheel Replacement ......................
6-47
WearIndicators ..............................
6-49
Wheel Replacement ...........................
6-47
When It’s Time for New .......................
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-54
2-27
TorqueLock ...................................
5-33, 6-69
Torque, Wheel Nut .........................
Towing
5-9
From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
FromtheRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 1
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-45
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
Yourvehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
4-52
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
Driving on Grades ............................
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-52
Engine Cooling When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47, 4-56
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-56
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-50
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-45
4-54
Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
4-56
Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24, 7-45
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 1
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Transmission Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20, 7-44
2-64
Transmitter,Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Transmitters, Keyless Entry ........................
8-8
Transportation,Courtesy ..........................
2-71
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underhood Fusemelay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
6-65
2-64
Vehicle
4-5
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Loading for Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
6-36
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
2-64
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-74
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
8-10
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 1. 7-45
6-56
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
9-11
Wheel
6-49
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.33.6.69
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6-50
Used Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 5-25
WindowLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.36,6.31. 7-45
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-38
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-36
9-12
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
6.43.6.70
Blade Replacement ......................
6-56
Cleaning the Blades ...........................
6-62
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-36
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-56
Wiring Harness, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Wiring, Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WreckerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5-24, 5-25
Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .